Undergraduate Handbook - School of Computing and Informatics ...

Contacts
CIT Management
Dean
Prof. Venansius Baryamureeba
Email: barya@cit.mak.ac.ug
Deputy Dean (Academic Affairs)
Dr. Idris Rai
Email: rai@cit.mak.ac.ug
Deputy Dean (Graduate Studies & Research)
Dr. Jude Lubega
Email: jlubega@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Department of Computer Science
Dr. John Ngubiri
Email: ngubiri@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Department of Information Systems
Dr. Agnes Rwashana Semwanga
Email: asemwanga@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Department of Information Technology
Dr. Josephine Nabukenya
Email: josephine@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Department of Networks
Dr. Benjamin Kanagwa
Email: bkanagwa@cit.mak.ac.ug
Dept of Innovation & Software Development
Paul Bagyenda
Email: Bagyenda@cit.mak.ac.ug
E-Learning Coordinator
Joseph .M. Ssemwogerere
Email: joseph@cit.mak.ac.ug
University General Contact
P.O. Box 7062 Kampala, Uganda
Tel: (256-414) 532631-4/540436
Telegragh “Makunika”
Faculty Accountant
Consolate Komugisha
Email: accountant@cit.mak.ac.ug
Faculty Registrar
Peace B. Tumuheki
Email: ptumuheki@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Corporate Relations Office
Michael Niyitegeka
Email: mniyitegeka@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Department of ICT Support Services
Johnson Mwebaze
Email: jmwebaze@cit.mak.ac.ug
Head, Human Resources Office
Rosette Birungi
Email: rbirungi@cit.mak.ac.ug
University Administration
Vice Chancellor
Email: vc@admin.mak.ac.ug
Deputy Vice Chancellor (Academic Affairs)
Email: dvaa@acadreg.mak.ac.ug
Deputy Vice Chancellor (Finance & Administration)
Email: dvcfa@admin.mak.ac.ug
University Secretary
Email: unisec@admin.mak.ac.ug
The Academic Registrar
Email: acadreg@acadreg.mak.ac.ug
The Dean of Students
Email: dos@makdos.mak.ac.ug
The University Bursar
Email: unibursar@nance.mak.ac.ug
The University Library
Email: mmusoke@mulib.mak.ac.ug
Directorate for ICT Support (DICTS)
Email: helpme@dicts.mak.ac.ug
University General Contact
P.O. Box 7062 Kampala, Uganda
Tel: (256-414) 532631-4/540436
CIT General Contact
Postal Address:
Makerere University Faculty of Computing & IT,
P.O. Box 7062 Kampala, Uganda
Physical Address:
Plot 56, Makerere University Pool Road,
Wandegeya Kampala
Tel: +256 414 540628
Fax: +256 414 540620
Email: info@cit.mak.ac.ug
Website: www.cit.mak.ac.ug
Physical Address:
Plot 56, Makerere University Pool Road,
Wandegeya Kampala

List of Acronyms
BIS Bachelor of Information Systems
BIT Bachelor of Information Technology
BSc Bachelor of Science
BSc CS Bachelor of Science in Computer Science
BSc.SE Bachelor of Science in Software Engineering
CCA Certificate in Computer Applications
CCNA Cisco Certified Network Associate
CCNP Cisco Certified Network Professional
CGPA Cumulative Grade Point Average
CIT Makerere University Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology
CU Course Unit
CS Computer Science
DCSE Data Communications and Software Engineering
DCSIT Diploma in Computer Science & Information Technology
EUTP End User Training Programme
GMAT Graduate Management Admission Test
ICDL International Computer Driving License
ICT Information Communication Technology
IT Information Technology
MAK Makerere University
MCDBA Microsoft Certified Database Administrator
MCSA Microsoft Certified Systems Administrator
MCSD Microsoft Certified Solutions Developer
MCSE Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer
MCT Microsoft Certified Trainers
MOS Microsoft Office User Specialist
MSc Master of Science
OCA Oracle Certified Associate
OCP Oracle Certified Professional
PGD Postgraduate Diploma
PhD Doctor of Philosophy
3

MAKERERE UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF COMPUTING AND INFORMATICS TECHNOLOGY
CIT Value Statement:
Makerere University Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology is an innovative and industry oriented
Faculty, pursuing excellence in teaching, learning, cutting edge value-added research and consultancy, community
outreach, as well as providing a vibrant student life.
CIT Vision Statement
To be a leader in Computing and ICT training, research and consultancy services on the African continent:
Makerere University Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology is an innovative and market-oriented
institution, pursuing inquiry, discovery and application through excellence in teaching and learning, value-added
research, cutting edge consultancy and vibrant student life.
CIT Mission Statement
To provide first class teaching, research and services in Computing and ICT responsive to national and international
needs.
About the Handbook
This handbook describes the range of undergraduate programmes offered by the Faculty of Computing and
Informatics Technology together with the information to assist the students in planning for their degree
programmes. The hand book also describes the various short/certification courses offered at the same Faculty.
The handbook gives the details of qualifications/pre-requisite for the courses, students’ regulations as well
as the details of the fees structure. Therefore, it is of great importance that Continuing and prospective students
study this book with care for the purposes of mastering the University regulations and other issues pertaining to the
programmes offered. The Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology takes pride in offering the best
Computing and ICT services, quality teaching and research and it is within our joy that you find this handbook
helpful as far as studying at CIT is concerned.
4

Table of Contents
Contacts ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
A Message from the Dean ............................................................................................................................................. 7
1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 ABOUT CIT ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 Academic Programmes Per Academic Department Taught at CIT ......................................................................... 9
1.3 Short Courses Offered at The Faculty ................................................................................................................... 10
1.4 Online Courses ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.5 Physical Infrastructure and Facilities ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION FOR THE STUDENTS ......................................................................................... 12
2.1 Application procedures .......................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2 Registration ............................................................................................................................................................ 12
2.3 Accepting or Declining a Place of Offer................................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Withdrawal ............................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.5 Fees and Other Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 13
2.6 Refund of Tuition fees when a student has withdrawn from studies ..................................................................... 14
2.7 University Fees structure ....................................................................................................................................... 14
2.8 CIT Finance Department-Revenue Section ........................................................................................................... 15
3.0 CONDUCT OF PROGRAMMES/COURSES ...................................................................................................... 16
3.1 Definition of an Academic Programme and a Course ........................................................................................... 16
3.2 Categorizing Courses ............................................................................................................................................. 16
3.3 Semester Course Load ........................................................................................................................................... 17
3.4 Assessment of Courses .......................................................................................................................................... 17
3.5 Certificate of Due Performance ............................................................................................................................. 17
3.6 Progression of Students ......................................................................................................................................... 17
3.7 Discontinuation ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.8 Re-taking a course ................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.9 Change of Course .................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.10 Change of Programme ......................................................................................................................................... 19
4.0 CONDUCT OF EXAMINATION ......................................................................................................................... 20
4.1 Sitting Semester Examinations .............................................................................................................................. 20
4.2 Absence from Examination ................................................................................................................................... 20
4.3 Deferred Examination ............................................................................................................................................ 20
4.4 Grading of Marks ................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.5 Calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) .............................................................................. 21
4.6 Classification of a Degree/Diploma ....................................................................................................................... 21
4.7 Approval of Examination Results .......................................................................................................................... 21
4.8 Appeals .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
4.9 Publication of results ............................................................................................................................................. 21
4.10 Moderation and External Examiners ................................................................................................................... 22
4.11 Malpractices in the conduct of Examinations ...................................................................................................... 22
5.0 Accommodation of Religious Creed ...................................................................................................................... 23
6.0 DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE ...................................................................................................... 24
6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.2 Bachelor of Science in Computer Science (BSc CS) Programme ......................................................................... 24
6.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................ 24
6.2.2 Programme Structure .......................................................................................................................................... 26
6.2.3 Course Unit Description ..................................................................................................................................... 27
6.3 Computer Science Subject for BSc Programme .................................................................................................... 42
6.4 Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology Programme (DSCIT) .............................................. 52
5

7.0 DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ..................................................................................... 65
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................... 65
7.2 Bachelor of Information Technology (BIT) Degree Programme........................................................................... 65
8.0 DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS ............................................................................................... 84
8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.2 Bachelor of Information Systems (BIS) Programme ............................................................................................. 84
9.0 DEPARTMENT OF NETWORKS ..................................................................................................................... 101
9.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
9.2 Bachelor of Science in Software Engineering Degree (BSc SE) Programme ..................................................... 101
9.2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 101
9.2.2 Programme Structure ........................................................................................................................................ 103
9.2.3 Course Unit Description ................................................................................................................................... 104
10.0 SHORT COURSES ........................................................................................................................................... 124
10.1 Short Courses taught at CIT .............................................................................................................................. 124
10.2 Certificate in Computer Applications (CCA) .................................................................................................... 124
10.3 International Computer Driving License (ICDL) .............................................................................................. 125
10.4 Microsoft Academy Programmes ...................................................................................................................... 125
10.5 Staff Development Programmes ........................................................................................................................ 130
10.6 Multimedia Certificate Courses: ........................................................................................................................ 130
10.7 Oracle Programmes ........................................................................................................................................... 130
10.8 Geographical Information Systems (GIS) ......................................................................................................... 131
10.9 Cisco Academy Programmes ............................................................................................................................. 132
10.10 Computer Systems Engineering ....................................................................................................................... 134
11.0 Summary of the Duration/Time of Study/Training Fees for Short Courses ...................................................... 134
12.0 Intake for Short Courses .................................................................................................................................... 135
13.0 Application Forms ............................................................................................................................................. 136
14.0 Registration Procedure....................................................................................................................................... 136
6

A Message from the Dean
Prof. Venansius Baryamureeba
Congratulations on your decision to undertake undergraduate studies at Makerere University Faculty of Computing
and Informatics Technology (CIT), and welcome to the CIT community. I hope you find your time at CIT
rewarding, challenging and exciting.
CIT is recognized internationally as an excellent teaching and research institution, providing a broad and balanced
coverage of disciplines in Computing, Information and Technology. The high standing the Faculty enjoys is a result
of a commitment to quality and excellence, reflecting the high standard of our students, staff and graduates. CIT is
and has always been committed to excellent teaching, staff development, research, and consultancy and community
enrichment among others.
The rapid development of computing and information technology has led to a new era of learning and knowledge.
The latest advancement in ICT has not only innovated our communication technology but has also expanded the
new possibilities of which knowledge transfer can take place. We are in the midst of witnessing a sudden change in
global economy and, in particular, in its sector that is closely associated with computing and Informatics
Technology. It is clear that people across the globe will continue to be influenced tremendously by the technology
that is evolving, the science that still needs to be understood and revealed, and the systems that are still being
created.
CIT offers Programmes in computing disciplines at all degree levels. In this handbook, you will find detailed
descriptions for our programs at undergraduate level, and short courses in various fields that we offer at the faculty.
Our curricula are revised every 3 years so as to catch up with the rapid changes of computing disciplines, and foster
for quality education with a global perspective. In addition, our Programmes have been carefully designed to ensure
that each CIT student is well prepared for the working environment of the 21 st century. CIT courses help students
become specialists in fields like Computer Networking, Software Engineering, Web Development, System Analysis
& Design, System Management and Administration, IT entrepreneurship to mention but a few.
As you may well know, CIT is the only place in Makerere University that is open 24/7/365 so at any time of the day
or night you will find life at CIT. This is aimed at narrowing the ICT gap in the region by offering additional
education opportunities and support to many young people each year.
The Faculty is devoted to providing its students with a high quality experience that is distinctive within the higher
education sector. It is committed to listening to what students ‘customers’ want from their time at CIT. The
academic staff, many of whom are international authorities in their specializations, provide invaluable input in terms
of course content and delivery - equipping the graduates with enterprising, creative and innovative skills necessary
for the global markets and that can respond to the ever changing global society needs.
CIT has excellent facilities to enable teaching and learning. Examples include state-of-art computer labs that
accommodate all students in the Faculty, wireless Internet connectivity across the faculty, etc. Last but not least, we
have strong collaborations with internationally renowned IT companies such as IBM, Microsoft, Google, HP, Dell,
etc who support our students and staff to attain various IT skills.
7
Dean

I wish you all the very best for your time at CIT.
Professor Venansius Baryamureeba
DEAN
8

1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 ABOUT CIT
Makerere University Faculty of Computing and Information Technology (CIT) was established by the University
Council on December 15, 2004 by upgrading the Institute of Computer Science (founded in 1985) into a Faculty of
Computing & IT. It is the largest computing and ICT training, research and consultancy centre in Africa. CIT has
attained a reputable status as a model faculty on the African continent with its achievements attained through its
commitment to delivering excellent services in the area of computing and ICT education.
The Faculty has 18 academic programmes at both undergraduate and graduate levels. As per 2009/2010 Academic
year, the Faculty has a total number of 3589 undergraduate and 236 graduate students distributed in four academic
departments. PhD enrollment stands at 60 students.
In addition, the faculty trains over 5000 students per year in short courses of which approximately 850 are
undergraduate students.
CIT has a big number of International students and this signifies that the programmes offered at CIT are of
international repute. As per 2009/2010 Academic year, the numbers of international students registered at the
Faculty were 593 undergraduate and 14 at graduate levels. However, this number does not include the number of
students at CIT who are undertaking the Short courses.
Human Resource: The established academic staff strength of the Faculty stands at 250 teaching staff including 30
visiting and local professors. The Faculty is also supported by 32 Administrative Staff, 31 support staff and 35 In-
Service staff.
Service/Support Units: In a bid to facilitate a first class student environment, the faculty has several service
departments that focus on the following: ICT Support Services; Software Development and Innovations; Finance;
Registration & day today concerns of students; Research; Human Resource; Corporate/Public Relations; and Quality
Assurance.
1.2 Academic Programmes Per Academic Department Taught at CIT
Department Programmes Offered
Computer Science PhD Computer Science (PhD.CS)
M.Sc. Computer Science (M.Sc. CS)
PGD Computer Science (PGDCS)
B.Sc. Computer Science (B.Sc.CS)
Information
Technology
Information
Systems
Diploma in Computer Science & IT (DCSIT)
PhD Information Technology (PhD. IT)
Master of Information Technology (MIT)
PGD Information Technology (PGDIT)
Bachelor of Information Technology (BIT)
PhD Information Systems (PhD. IS)
M.Sc. Information Systems (M.Sc.IS)
PGD Information Systems (PGDIS)
Bachelor of Information Systems (BIS)
Networks PhD Software Engineering (PhD SE)
M.Sc. Data Communication and Software Engineering (M.Sc. DCSE)
PGD in Data Communication & Software Engineering (PGDDCSE)
PGD ICT Policy & Regulations ( PGD ICT PR)
B.Sc. Software Engineering (B.Sc. SE)
B.Sc. Computer Engineering (B.Sc. CE) (Proposed)
9

1.3 Short Courses Offered at The Faculty
• Certificate in Computer Application (CCA)
• CIT CISCO Academy Programmes
o Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA)
o Cisco Certified Network Professional (CCNP)
o IT Essentials I & II
o International Computer Driving License (ICDL)
• Multimedia Certified Courses
o Certificate in Graphics and Image Editing
o Certificate in Video Editing and Animation
o Certificate in Dynamic Website Development
• Microsoft Academy Programmes
o Microsoft Certified Database Administrators (MCDBA)
o Microsoft Certified Systems Engineers (MCSA)
o Microsoft Certified Systems Administrators (MCSE)
o Microsoft Office User Specialists (MOS)
o Microsoft Certified Solutions Developer (MCSD)
• Oracle Programmes
o Oracle Certified Associate (OCA)
o Oracle Certified Professional (OCP)- Proposed
• Staff Development Programme (Advanced End –User Training Programme in ICT Skills)
• Geographical Information Systems(GIS)
• Computer Systems Engineering Course
a. Midnight University
Because of the popular demand for short courses and in a bid to meet the national needs and various needs of its
clientele, CIT instituted the popularly termed Midnight Programme. Its basic aim is to support ICT led socioeconomic
development through providing ‘ICT Education for All’. This programme mainly caters for those who may
not find time during the day and evening hours and also caters for those financially constrained since its rates are
subsidized (50% discount). Under the midnight programme, courses run from midnight up to 6:00 am. Courses run
under this programme are CCNA and CCA.
b. Testing center
CIT is an authorized Prometric testing and Pearson VUE Testing Centre. Through these Testing Centers, different
IT certification exams are delivered including Microsoft exams leading to Microsoft Systems Engineer
(MCSE), Microsoft Database Administrator (MCDBA), Microsoft Systems Administrator (MCSA), Microsoft
Solution Developer (MCSD) and ORACLE exams through Pearson VUE. Some none IT exams like GMAT are also
delivered. The centre also delivers International Computer Driving License (ICDL) exams.
10

1.4 Online Courses
Amity University offers programmes under the Pan-African e-Network through Tele-Education mode. The
programmes are offered under the Pan-African E-Network Project coordinated by the Ministry of ICT of the
Republic of Uganda, and the National Tele-Education Learning Centre set up at CIT
(http://cit.mak.ac.ug/pan_african.php). NB: Application fee is 100,000/= for all the courses.
Programme Duration Operational Fees per Semester
Master in Financial Control 2 years 500,000/=
MBA in International Business 2 years 500,000/=
Post graduate Diploma in IT 1 year 400,000/=
Bachelor of Science in IT 3 Years 350,000/=
1.5 Physical Infrastructure and Facilities
CIT has the largest computing facility in Africa housed in 15,000 sq meters of space worth over $20million. Its two
buildings can accommodate up to 10,000 students in one sitting.
Block A building was donated by the Royal Kingdom of Norway to then Institute of Computer Science. The
building has offices, 9 fully furnished labs and a conference room.
Block B was funded from internally generated funds was completed in December 2008, and was officially
commissioned by H.E the President of the Republic of Uganda on January 28, 2009. It has: 6 computer labs each
accommodating 700 students of which one is fully equipped; 4 smaller computer labs each accommodating 120
students of which two are fully equipped; and 8 small and 6 big lecture theatres.
CIT established a wide range of specialized labs which include: Computer Engineering Lab; Advanced
Geographical Information Systems [GIS] Lab; Advanced Multimedia Lab; Mobile Computing Lab; Pan African E-
Network Tele-Education Labs; Network Systems Lab; National Software Incubation Centre/Lab; E-Learning Lab;
Online Networking Laboratory (iNetLab); Cisco Academy Training Labs; and Teaching Labs equipped with 2,000
computers.
Makerere University Main Library supports teaching, research and project activities of Makerere University. The
Library provides access to books, print journals, e-journals, a well stocked reference section and connections to
many remote databases. www.mulib.mak.ac.ug.
Library Services: Makerere University Main Library supports teaching, research and project activities of Makerere
University. The Library provides access to books, print journals, e-journals, a well stocked reference section and
connections to many remote databases. The library has a substantial collection of report material much of it "grey"
literature. The University has subscribed to a number of online journals and continues to consult Faculties to update
the online journal lists. The Online Journals provide a range of products from abstracts to full text papers. The
University Library has also acquired a wide range of online books which are to access and this is in line with
promoting e-learning. For more details: www.mulib.mak.ac.ug. Makerere University Library supports a book bank
system which is operated at the Faculty level (Block B Building). The book bank is stocked with update literature.
The books in the book bank have been acquired through supplies from the Makerere University Library and
purchases by the Faculty for books that are difficult to purchase by the main library.
11

2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION FOR THE STUDENTS
Studies and examinations for undergraduate Programmes in the Faculty of Computing and IT shall be governed by
the general regulations statutes of Makerere University and in addition by the regulations of the Faculty of
Computing and Informatics Technology.
2.1 Application procedures
(a) Information for Prospective Students
Application forms and other relevant information may be obtained from undergraduate Admissions Office
level 3, Senate building, Makerere University. Application fee of 20,000/= (Ugandan Applicant) and bank
charge of 2,500 and 101,000/= for International Applicants. This fee should be paid in any DFCU bank
and Stanbic Bank branches using Makerere University pay-in slip/ bank slips. Applicants fill in four copies of
pay-in slips and after paying they are expected to present a copy when they are submitting the completed
application forms to the admissions office, Makerere University. All applications for diplomas have to satisfy
the requirements of the relevant courses and the University regulations. Application forms can
be downloaded from (http://www.mak.ac.ug). International applicants should contact Makerere University
Academic Registrar’s for application forms and more information. Please provide your e-mail and fax
addresses for ease of transmission of these forms where applicable.
(b) Direct Entry/ Diploma Holders/ Mature Age Entry Scheme
Unless otherwise stated, all applications from private sponsorships are made in May of each academic year. The
closing date for receiving applications is normally late the same month of the year in which the admission is
sought. All completed application forms must be accompanied by relevant copies of certificates.
(c) Application forms from International students are received from 1st April to 30th April of each year.
2.2 Registration
For a candidate to be a full student of the University he/she must be registered. Registration is a mandatory function
of the Faculty as well as the University which must be done within six (6) weeks from the beginning of the semester
by every student. Registration center is under the supervision of the Faculty Registrar at the Faculty premises who
produces and displays detailed registration programmes. Students are advised to use names that appear on their
admissions letters, and these should be the names that appear on O’ Level and A’ Level results slips, Diploma
Transcripts etc. All undergraduate students are expected to be registered on the Academic Registrar’s Information
System (ARIS) for their programmes and respective courses so as to be availed with Examination permits. All
undergraduate Students are urged to fill the bio-data form as soon as possible to provide the necessary
information required by the system.
2.3 Accepting or Declining a Place of Offer
a) Any first year student who will not have registered with in the first six (6) weeks of the beginning of
the academic year shall be deemed to have declined the offer of a place at the University as well as the
faculty. His/her place shall accordingly be offered to another student through the change
of programme/subject exercise.
b) Any students in the first year of studies, who for some reasons are unable to register or take up his /her
place in the University by the end of the registration period, are advised to re-apply again for the
admission of the following academic year by following the same application procedures. Please note that
you need to re-apply for admission and complete afresh with the applicants for that academic year.
12

2.4 Withdrawal
a) A registered student must apply to the Board of the Faculty for permission to withdraw from studies at
anytime of the semester. Reasons for withdrawal should be given in the letter of application. A student will
be allowed only a maximum of two (2) withdrawals in an academic Programme and each withdrawal shall
be a maximum of one academic year only.
b) Permission to withdraw shall be granted by the Faculty Board only on compassionate grounds or in cases of
illness or financial constraints serious social or domestic difficulties or exceptional professional
commitment which can be demonstrated to have adversely affected the candidate.
c) A student who had withdrawn from studies shall apply to his/her respective Faculty Board to resume
studies and shall indicate that the circumstances that made him/her withdraw can no longer affect his/her
studies.
2.5 Fees and Other Requirements
Before applying, applicants are advised to make sure that they have adequate financial support to cover tuition and
functional fees as well as other requirements. Fees do not cover research and accommodation expenses. An
acceptable guarantee of financial support throughout the proposed course is necessary
2.5.1 Payment of Fees
a) Tuition and other University fees are due on the first day of the Academic year. Privately –sponsored students
who cannot pay full fees at the beginning of the academic year are required to pay at least 60% of the Course
Load, if they wish, by the set deadline and register for and attend lectures for and sit examinations for only those
courses.
b) A first year Privately-sponsored student who fails to pay the entire Functional Fees (Registration Fee,
Examination Fees, Research Fees, Library Fees, Development fee, Technology fee) shall forfeit his/her place
in the University.
c) Only registered students will be allowed to use University facilities, to attend lecturers, do Coursework and sit
for University End of Semester Examinations.
d) A privately-sponsored student who shall not have paid at least 60% of the fees by the end of the 6 th week shall be
de-registered.
e) A privately-sponsored student who shall not have completed paying fees by the end of the 6 th week will not be
allowed to sit for University tests and examinations.
f) Fees for Residence, Application, Faculty Requirements, Registration, Examinations, Identity Cards, Library, and
Guild Charges are not refunded.
g) The University Council reserves the right to vary fees chargeable anytime with or without prior notice.
h) International Students are advised to pay fees in Uganda Shillings.
Other requirements like books, stationery, and materials, accommodation, food, research expenses, etc, the sponsor
should pay it directly to the student.
2.5.2 Mode of payment
a) University fees MUST be paid to DFCU Bank Makerere or any Stanbic Bank Ltd Branch and using payin/Deposit
slips, and clearly marking the item(s) being paid for. It is, therefore advisable that students open
Accounts with any of the above banks to ease transaction. Pay-in/Deposit slips are obtainable from the
University Bursar’s office or Senate Building; Room 202. Students’ numbers and registration numbers must be
used in all payments of the University fees.
b) Fees can also be paid by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) money transfer to Makerere University Council
13

Account Number – 0140018673101 Stanbic Bank Makerere Branch.
c) University fees (i.e. Registration, Administration, Library, Research, Internship, Development, Technology and
Examination, others like Caution, undergraduate gowns and Tuition) MUST be paid to the University before
registration. Graduation, Certificate, Convocation and Academic Transcript fees will be paid on completion of the
course.
d) Payment of fees may be made in Lump Sum on arrival or in installments (per Semester) by using the student
numbers to pay in the Bank.
e) Payments can also be made by Bank Drafts in the names of Makerere University council.
f) Students are required to present copies of the pay-in slips to CIT Revenue Office (2 nd Floor room 203) to get their
financial statements.
g) Sponsors/Parents/Guardians are advised to avoid giving lots of money to students but to pay fees directly to the banks
indicated under (i) and (ii) above.
h) Enquiries on payment of fees should be done from the office of the University Bursar in the Main administration
Building or from CIT revenue Office (2 nd Floor room 203).
2.6 Refund of Tuition fees when a student has withdrawn from studies
A registered student who has been permitted to withdraw from studies shall be refunded the Tuition fees for the
semester paid according to the following schedules:
The time at which a student has withdrawn in a Semester Percentage of paid Tuition to be Refunded
(a) By the end of the First week of a Semester 100%
(b) By the end of the Second week of a Semester 80%
(c) By the end of the Third week of a Semester 60%
(d) By the end of the Fourth week of a semester 40%
(e) By the end of the Fifth week of a semester 20%
(f) After the fifth week 0%
Note: Fees application, residence, Faculty requirements, registration, examinations, Identity card, Library and Guild
charges are not refunded since services will have been rendered.
2.7 University Fees structure
a. Functional fees (payable to the University)
Item Ugandans Non-Ugandans Period
(UGX) (UGX)
Application Fee 20,000 101,000 Payable at the time of Application
Registration Fee 100,000 202,000 Per year
Examination Fee 100,000 303,000 Per year
Library Fee 20,000 40,400 Per year
Development Fee 123,500 222,200 Per year
Contribution towards Research Fund 20,000 40,400 Per year
Technology Fee 50,000 101,000 Per year
Internship Fee 100,000 100,000 Per semester
University Identity card 15,000 40,400
Rules and Caution 2,000 2,000
Academic Gown 16,000 16,000
Late Registration (surcharge)Fee 50,000 101,000
Accommodation
i. Fee per semester
ii. Recess term
220,000 600,000 Per semester
14

Certification fee 3,000 20,200 Per copy
Re-Examination Fee 20,000 40,400 Per course
Graduation Fee 30,000 101,000 On graduation
Convocation Fee 10,000 20,200 On graduation
Certificate Fee 20,000 101,000 On graduation
Transcript fee 20,000 101,000 On graduation
b. Tuition Fees per Semester
Course Ugandan (UGX) Non-Ugandans (UGX)
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science 1,260,000 1,890,000
Bachelor of Information Technology 1,260,000 1,890,000
Bachelor of Information System 1,300,000 2,525,000
Bachelor of Science in Software Engineering 1,300,000 2,525,000
Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology 1,050,000 1,260,000
2.8 CIT Finance Department-Revenue Section
This Section is part of Finance Department in CIT and the services offered to the students are: Answering all
Students' queries concerning fees payments; assisting Students in interpreting Students’ Financial statements
generated from Financial Integrated Information System (FINIS ); guiding students on payment procedures and
terms; assisting students in getting their certificates through issuance of clearance forms; in case a student gets a
retake, revenue section helps students in computing the required fees to be paid; advising Students to meet fees
payment deadlines; Financial information dissemination from University Bursar's office to Students and the overall
matters concerning Students fees. For more information write to revenue@cit.mak.ac.ug
15

3.0 CONDUCT OF PROGRAMMES/COURSES
3.1 Definition of an Academic Programme and a Course
3.1.1 Academic Programmes
Each Academic Programme shall be defined by Courses. An Academic Programme shall be composed of a set of
prescribed Courses that shall be registered for by a student in order for him/her to qualify for the Award of a
particular Degree/Diploma/Certificate.
3.1.2 A Course
A Course is a unit of work in a particular Field/area of a study normally extending through one Semester the
completion of which normally carries credit towards the fulfillment of the requirements of certain Degrees,
Diploma, or certificates.
3.1.3 A Contact Hour
A contact hour is equivalent to One (1) hour of lecture/Clinical or Two (2) Hours of Tutorial/Practical or four (4)
hours Fieldwork.
3.1.4 A Credit or Credit Unit
A Credit or Credit Unit is the measure used to reflect the relevant weight of a given Course towards the fulfillment
of appropriate Degree, Diploma, Certificate or other programmes required. One (1) Credit Unit shall be One (1)
Contact Hour per Week per Semester or a series of fifteen (15) Contact Hours.
3.2 Categorizing Courses
Courses are categorized as Core, Elective, Pre-requisite or Audited. Not all Courses in an Academic programme are
made Core. The Courses of the first year studies are called pre-requisite or introductory courses. The number of
elective Courses that each student shall be required to register for in every undergraduate Academic Programme
shall always be stated so as to guide the students when they are choosing them from a particular Elective Course.
Courses in the Programmes shall be categorized as follows:-
a) A Core Course
This is one which is essential to an Academic Programme and gives the Academic programme its unique
feature. Everyone offering that particular academic programme must pass that Course. Core Courses shall
be offered in all the Semesters.
b) An Elective Course
This is one which is offered in order to broaden an Academic Programme or to allow for specialization. It
is chosen from a given group of courses largely at the convenience of the student. Another Elective
Course may be substituted for a failed Elective course.
c) An Audited Course
This is one which is offered by a student for which a credit/credit Unit shall not be awarded.
d) A Pre-requisite Course
A pre-requisite is a condition (either Course of Classification), which has to be satisfied prior to enrolling
for the course in question.
A pre-requisite course therefore is a Course offered in preparation for a higher level Course in the same
area of study.
16

3.3 Semester Course Load
Semester Load shall be the total number of Courses for a particular Academic Programme offered in a Semester.
The Courses to be Retaken and those to be Audited shall be within the Maximum semester Load of every student.
3.3.1 Normal Semester Load
The normal semester Load for undergraduate academic programmes range from Fifteen (15) Credit units to Twenty-
One (21) Credit Units. A full time student shall not carry less than 15 Credit Units and not more than 21 Credit Units
per semester.
3.3.2 Maximum Semester Load
The maximum Semester Load for Undergraduate Academic Programmes is Twenty-eight (28) Credit Units so as to
cater for students who have Courses to retake or those who would be able to complete the requirements for their
respective Academic Awards in less than the stipulated minimum duration.
3.4 Assessment of Courses
Each course shall be assessed in two (2) parts as follows:
a) The Coursework (Progressive/ Continuous Assessment), for the Faculty of Computing and Informatics
Technology shall contribute 40% of the Total Marks.
b) The Coursework (Progressive/Continuous Assessment) Component shall consist of at least One (1) test
and One (1) Homework/Take-Home Assignment OR Two (2) Tests per Course.
c) A minimum of two coursework assignments/tests shall be required per course.
d) The University Examinations for the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology shall contribute a
maximum of 60% of the Total Marks.
e) For practical courses (industrial/field training) assessment shall be by assignment and or a report form.
Note: Coursework is also a University examination, copying and /handing in coursework similar to another
student’s work, or hiring another person to do one’s coursework is an examination malpractice that will lead to
dismissal from the University.
3.5 Certificate of Due Performance
i. A student who fails to honor the deadline set for handing in assignment without justifiable cause(s) shall receive
a score of a zero or fail grade in that assignment.
ii. A student who does not have coursework marks shall be denied Certificate of Due performance and will not be
allowed to sit the University Examinations.
3.6 Progression of Students
Progression of a student shall be classified as Normal, Probationary or Discontinuation
3.6.1 Normal Progress
Normal Progress shall occur when a student has passed assessments in all the Courses he/she had registered for in a
particular semester and not when he/she passed the Assessments in the Core Courses only.
17

3.6.2 Probationary Progress
A student who has obtained the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of less than 2.0 shall be placed on
probation. Such a student shall be allowed to progress to the next Semester/Academic Year but shall still retake the
Course(s) he/she had failed the Assessments in later on and obtain at least the Pass mark (50%) in the Course(s).
3.7 Discontinuation
a) When a student accumulates three consecutive probations based on CGPA he/she shall be discontinued.
b) A student who has failed to obtain at least the Pass Mark (50%) during the Third Assessment in the same
Course or Courses he/she had retaken shall be discontinued from his/her studies at the University;
c) A student who has overstayed in an Academic programme by more than Two (2) Years shall be discontinued
from his/her studies at the University.
3.8 Re-taking a course
a) A student shall retake a Course when he/she is given another offer in order to obtain at least the Pass Mark
(50%) if he/she had failed during the first Assessment in the Course or Courses. A student who has failed to
obtain at least the Pass Mark (50%) during the Second Assessment in the same Course he/she has retaken shall
receive a warning.
b) A student may retake a Course or Courses when next offered again in order to improve his/her Pass Grade(s) if
the Pass Grade(s) for at the first Assessment in the Course or Courses were low. A student who fails to attain
higher marks after retaking to improve, the examination results of the first sitting are recorded as Retake.
c) Where a student misses to sit examinations for justified reasons; the grades obtained after sitting examination
shall not be recorded as a retake because the candidate is sitting the examinations for the first attempt.
d) While retaking a course or Courses, a student shall; attend all the prescribed lectures/tutorials/ practical in the
course; satisfy all the requirements for the Coursework Component in the Course; and sit for the University
Examinations in the Course
e) A student shall not be allowed to accumulate more than five (5) Retake Courses at a time. Students are required
to register for retake course(s) first before registering for new courses offered in that semester and the retake
courses should fit into the approved normal load to avoid time table clash.
f) A final year student whose final examination Results have already been classified by the relevant Faculty Board
and has qualified for the Award of a degree/Diploma/Certificate, shall not be permitted to retake any course.
g) When a student has retaken a course, the better of the two Grades he/she has obtained in that Courses shall be
used in the computation of his/her Cumulative Grade Average (CGPA). Whenever a Course has been retaken,
the Academic Transcript shall indicate it accordingly.
h) Students who have a course(s) to retake and these Course(s) fall beyond the set normal semester load for their
Academic programmes shall pay tuition fees for any Course/Courses to be retaken. Besides, such students also
pay the reexamination fees per Course retaken as well as the registration fees.
3.9 Change of Course
A student may be permitted to change course(s) in an Academic Programme in order to substitute the
Course(s) failed. The Substitute Course(s) should be within the specified Course(s) for that Academic
Programme.
18

3.10 Change of Programme
a) A student may be permitted to change from one academic Programme to another on condition that:
i. He/She had satisfied the admission requirements for the Academic Programme applied for;
ii. He/She should not have been attending lectures/tutorials and other academic activities of the Academic
programme he/she would want to change from for more than one-half of the duration of the
programme.
iii. He/She had not been previously dismissed on displinary grounds from the University.
b) A student permitted to change his/her Programme may be allowed to transfer the Credits from the previous
Academic programme to the new Academic Programme, provided that the Credits being transferred are relevant
to the new Academic Programme.
19

4.0 CONDUCT OF EXAMINATION
4.1 Sitting Semester Examinations
Only registered students are permitted to sit University examinations. A student who does not pay all the required
University fees will not be permitted to sit the University examinations. The examination results of any student
who has sat the examinations without being registered shall be nullified. Students are strongly warned against this.
4.2 Absence from Examination
a) If the Board of the Faculty found out that a student has no justifiable reason for having been absent from a
particular examination, such a student shall receive a fail (F) Grade for the Course (s) he/she had not sat the
examination in. The Course(s) in which the Fail (F) Grade was/were awarded shall also account in the
calculation of the CGPA.
b) If the board of a Faculty is satisfied that a student was absent from coursework assessment and or a final
examination due to justifiable reason(s) such as sickness or loss o a parent/guardian, then a Course Grade
of ABS shall be assigned to that course(s).
NOTE: First Years that are not yet registered with the Faculty/University are not eligible for the above opportunity
4.3 Deferred Examination
a) A student who provides credible reason for failure to complete coursework assessment or to attend an
examination based on 4.2 (b) above may be permitted to ‘sit’ the deferred examination or coursework
assignment when the course(s) is being offered again.
b) Students needing a deferred exam must submit application to their respective Dean’s or Director’s Office.
The application and supporting documentation pertaining to the absence must be presented as soon as the
student is able, having regard to the circumstances underlying the absence but not later than the beginning
of the Semester in which the examination is scheduled. Where the cause is incapacitating illness, a student
must present a University Hospital Medical Statement Form. In other cases, including severe domestic
affliction, adequate documentation must be provided to substantiate the reason for an absence.
4.4 Grading of Marks
The overall Marks a candidate obtains in each Course he/she offered is graded out of a maximum of One
hundred (100) Marks and assigned appropriate Letter Grades and Grade Points as follows:
MARKS LETTER GRADE GRADE POINT INTERPRETATION
90 - 100 A+ 5 Exceptional
80 - 89 A 5 Excellent
75 - 79 B+ 4.5 Very Good
70 - 74 B 4 Good
65 - 69 C+ 3.5 Fairly good
60 - 64 C 3 Fair
55 - 59 D+ 2.5 Pass
50 - 54 D 2 Marginal Pass
45 - 49 E+ 1.5 Marginal Fail
40 - 44 E- 1 Clear Fail
0 - 39 F 0 Bad Fail
A student with a grade point greater or equal to 2 (Letter Grade D) is considered to have passed the course unit.
20

Note: The above Grading System is for the intake of 2008/2009 Academic Year on wards.
4.5 Calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
The cumulative grade point average at a given time shall be obtained by:
a) Multiplying the grade point obtained in each course by the Credit Units (CU) assigned to the Course to
arrive at the Weighted Score for the Course.
b) Adding together the Weighted Scores for all Courses taken up to that time to obtain total Weighted Score.
c) Dividing the total Weighted Score by the total number of Credit Units taken (attempted) up to that time.
Example:
Courses CU Grade points Weighted Score
CSC 1100 4 3.0 C 3.0 x 4 = 12
CSK 1101 4 4.0 B 4.0 x 4 = 16
BIT 1100 3 4.0 B 4.0 x 3 = 12
CSC 1104 4 5.0 A+ 5.0 x 4 = 20
CSC 1106 3 2.0 C- 2.0 x 3 = 6
Total 18 Total = 66
(66 divided by 18 i.e. 66/18 = 3.66 CGPA)
4.6 Classification of a Degree/Diploma
The degree obtained in the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology shall be classified according to the CGPA
as follows;
CLASS CGPA
First 4.40 – 5.00
Second Upper Division 3.60 – 4.39
Second Lower Division 2.80 – 3.59
Pass 2.00 – 2.79
4.7 Approval of Examination Results
The Senate has delegated the power to approve all examination results to the Board of the Faculty. But the results
shall not be regarded as final until they are confirmed by Senate on submission of Appropriate Pass Lists to Senate
by the relevant Board. The Appropriate Pass lists to Senate should be accompanied with Faculty Board Minutes.
Students shall be provided with examination results using the approved testimonial format.
4.8 Appeals
Any student or candidate aggrieved by a decision of the Board of the Faculty of Computing and Informatics
Technology may appeal to the Senate Examinations Committee for reversal or Moderation of the decision of the
Board.
4.9 Publication of results
The relevant department shall publish provisional Examination Results of Candidates in every examination son after
the meeting of departmental Examination Committee; the Examination Results shall be arranged and published in a
manner as prescribed by Senate.
21

4.10 Moderation and External Examiners
All question papers shall be moderated internally and where need be externally moderated by the external examiner.
In addition external examiners shall participate in vetting of questions and making of scripts for all final
examinations. They shall participate in overall results and classification of degrees.
4.10.1 Board of Examiners
There shall be a Faculty Board of Examiners composed of external and internal examiners appointed by senate on
the recommendation of the board of the Faculty of CIT. The Board shall be chaired by the Dean of the Faculty. The
Board of Examiners shall receive, consider and recommend to the faculty Board the examination results of each
candidate.
4.11 Malpractices in the conduct of Examinations
It shall be an offence for a student/candidate involved in an examination/test to:
(a) Sit or attempt to sit the examination without valid documentation.
(b) Enter the examination hall/room later than half an hour after the examination/test has commenced.
(c) Leave the examination hall/room earlier than half an hour after the examination has commenced except in
emergencies with the express permission of the invigilator.
(d) Carry out a conversation or any other communication with another student/candidate once the examination
has commenced.
(e) Indulge in any disruptive conduct including, but not limited to, shouting assault of another
student/candidate, using abusive and /or threatening language, destruction of university property or the
property of another student/candidate.
(f) Take out of the examination room/hall answer booklet(s), used or unused.
(g) Neglect, omit or in any other way fail to follow lawful instructions or orders issued by the invigilator.
(h) Physically assault or insult an Invigilator or any University Official involved in the conduct of the
examination.
4.11.1 Cheating in Examinations
Cheating is defined as any illegitimate behavior designed to deceive those setting, administering and marking the
assessment. Cheating in a University assessment is a very serious academic offence, which may lead ultimately to
expulsion from the University. Cheating can take one of a number of forms, including:
(a) Taking into the exam venue, or possessing whilst in that room, any books, notes or other material which
has/have not been authorized. Writing notes on any part of your body, recording apparatus, mobile phones
or any other unauthorized electronic equipment. Having notes written in your identity documents or
authorized examination materials e.g. logarithm table
(b) Copying from another student in an examination. Aiding or attempting to aid another candidate, or
obtaining or attempting to obtain aid from another candidate.
(c) Involve oneself in Plagiarism, that is:
• Pass off the words or ideas of someone else as his/her own without proper acknowledge or
crediting the original source.
• Replicate one’s own work which one has presented elsewhere for assessment.
(d) Obtaining an examination paper ahead of its authorized release.
(e) Sit or attempt to sit the examination without valid documentation
22

4.11.2 Fraud in Examinations
It shall be an offence for a student/candidate involved in an examination to:
(a) Import into the examination hall/room, in person or by agent, a pre-prepared answer script/booklet.
(b) Substitute an answer script/booklet prepared outside the examination room/hall for the one already
submitted to the invigilator/Examiner.
(c) Falsify or alter marks awarded on an examination script/book.
(d) Impersonate another student/candidate.
(e) Procure or induce another person to sit for him/her.
4.11.3 Penalty
Any student/candidate found guilty of contravening the above shall be liable to:
(a) Caution and cancellation of the relevant examination, or
(b) Cancellation of the relevant examination and suspension from the University for a period not exceeding
two years, or
(c) Cancellation of the relevant examinations and dismissal from the University.
(d) A Government-sponsored student/candidate found guilty of contravening the above, may have the
Government sponsorship cancelled besides any other punishment taking into account the gravity of the
offence except in cases where the student/candidate is dismissed from the University.
(e) Any student/candidate found guilty of contravening the above by physically assaulting an Invigilator or a
University official shall be dismissed from the University.
5.0 Accommodation of Religious Creed
(a) Makerere University is a secular institution. It is the official policy of the University that all days in a week
are considered working days. Staff and students are expected to conduct or attend lectures and
examinations at scheduled time and say.
(b) Requests to accommodate a student’s religious creed by scheduling tests or examinations at alternative
times may not be entertained.
(c) Students who miss exams or test based on religious creed should inform their respective Deans/directors as
soon as the timetable is published preferably two weeks before categorized as being absent without
justifiable cause and a Course Grade of ABS shall be assigned to that Course(s).
23

6.0 DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE
6.1 Introduction
The Department of Computer Science, together with the Departments of Networks, Information Technology and
Information Systems form the academic departments of the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology. The
department aims at being a world class center of teaching and research in the general field of Computer Science.
The Department runs the Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology, The Bachelor of Science in
Computer Science, The Postgraduate Diploma in Computer Science, Master of Science in Computer Science and a
Doctor of Philosophy in Computer Science.
All our Programmes are carefully designed to; (i) provide students with the needed hands on skills (ii) allow
students explore their creativity to the limits and (iii) challenge students dig deeper in the enormous body of
knowledge. The programmes are conducted by highly trained and well motivated team of academic and technical
staff using state of the art equipments and methodologies.
The department is a very active center of research. Currently, our research is mainly based in;
(i) Foundations of Computing
(ii) Computer Security
(iii) Computer Vision and
(iv) Image processing.
The department is a beneficially of the Makerere wide policy forging collaborations with other research institutes all
over the world. The department has strong research corroborations with several universities especially in America
and Europe. Several of its members of staff are undertaking doctoral studies in these universities. The departmental
strategy in research is to carry out research directly linked to the current technological and operational status of
Uganda and Africa as a whole.
As a means of ensuring and upholding quality in all the departmental programmes (academic and research), the
department does periodic review and evaluations of its progress and quality of delivery. Stake holders can send
comments and complements any time to the Head of Department of the Departmental Senior administrative
Assistant – as we build for the future.
The Department of Computer Science runs three (3) programmes namely;
• Bachelor of Science in Computer Science (BSc CS) Degree Programme
• Computer Science Subject for BSc Degree Programme
• Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology (DCSIT) Programme
6.2 Bachelor of Science in Computer Science (BSc CS) Programme
6.2.1 Overview
The Bachelor of Science in Computer Science is the oldest undergraduate degree Programme in Makerere University
Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology. The revised curriculum took effect in the 2009/2010 Academic
Year. The objectives of the Programme are to:
24
Dr. John Ngubiri
Head of Department

a) Develop professionals with theoretical and practical skills in Computer Science;
b) Strengthen capacity and institutional building in Computer Science in tertiary institutions, the private and public
sector;
c) Build capacity with a practical orientation needed to link up the Computer Science sector with Government and
Industry under the broader perspective of information and Communication Technology (ICT) and ;
d) Provide most of the ICT professionals needed in Uganda and neighboring countries.
1. Target Group
The revised Programme targets two categories of People. These are A-level leavers and diploma holders in relevant
disciplines.
2. Minimum Admission Requirements
To be admitted to the BSc (Computer Science) Programme, a candidate must satisfy the general admission requirements
for Makerere University. In addition, the following regulations shall hold:
a) Direct Entry
Candidates seeking admission through this avenue must have obtained:
i. At least a subsidiary pass in Mathematics in the Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE) or
its equivalent.
ii. At least two principal passes at the same sitting in Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE)
in any of the following subjects: - Mathematics, Economics, Entrepreneurship, Geography, Physics,
Chemistry, Biology, Agriculture, Technical Drawing and Food and Nutrition.
iii. A minimum weighted points set by the Makerere University Admissions Board.
For purposes of computing weighted points, the A- level subjects shall be grouped and weighted as follows:
b) Diploma Holders
Group Weight Subjects
Essential 3 Any two best done of the above subjects
Relevant 2 The third best done of the above subjects
Desirable 1 General Paper, Sub-Mathematics
Others 0.5 All others.
For a candidate to be admitted via the diploma scheme, he/she must:
i. Have at least 5 passes got at the same sitting of Uganda Certificate of Education or its equivalent
ii. Have at least 1 Principle pass and 2 subsidiary passes from the same sitting of the Uganda Advanced
Certificate of Education (UACE) or its equivalent
iii. Have a Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology of Makerere University or have at least a
Second class (lower division) diploma in Computer Science, Engineering, Business Studies, and Information
Technology, Statistics or any other diploma with Mathematics, Computer Science, or Information
Technology as one of the subjects. The diploma must be from an Institution recognized by the National
Council for Higher Education (of Uganda).
3. Nature of the Programme
The day Programme has both government and privately sponsored students. The evening Programme has privately
sponsored students only.
4. Duration
The duration of the Programme is six (6) semesters which are three (3) Academic Years and two (2) recess terms. Each
semester lasts seventeen (17) weeks two of which are for examinations.
5. Tuition Fees
25

Tuition fees for privately sponsored students shall be 2,520,000 Uganda Shillings per year for Ugandans and
3,780,000 Uganda Shillings per year for non Ugandans. This is the same tuition fees for the existing curriculum.
6. Semester Load and Minimum Graduation Load
The normal semester load is between 15 and 21 credit units. The minimum graduation load is 127 credit units
of which 111 credit units are from core course units. The remaining 16 credit units are to be got from elective
course units in semesters where elective courses are offered.
6.2.2 Programme Structure
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 1104 Computer Organization & Architecture 4 60 -- -- 60
CSC 1105 Numerical Methods 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 1206 Computational Mathematics 4 30 60 -- 60
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
CSC 1208 Individual Project I 4 15 90 -- 60
CSC 1209 Logic Programming 3 30 30 -- 45
Year I: Recess term
CSC 1301 Practical Skills Development 4 -- 120 -- 60
CSC 1303 Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited) 5 150 100 -- 200
Semester 3
CSC 2100 Data Structures and Algorithms 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2105 Formal Methods 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2109 Discrete Mathematics 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 2113 Software Engineering 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2114 Artificial Intelligence 3 30 -- 30 45
Semester 4
CSC 2200 Operating Systems 4 45 -- 30 35
BSE 2203 Computer Networks & Data Communication 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 2209 Systems Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2210 Automata, Complexity & Computability 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 2212 Individual Project II 3 -- 90 -- 45
1 Elective
BSE 2201 Network Applications Development 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 2214 Cryptology and Coding Theory 3 45 -- -- 45
Year 2: Recess Term
CSC 2301 Industrial Training 4 -- 120 -- 60
Semester 5
CSC 3103 User Interface Design 4 30 -- 60 60
BIT 3102 Entrepreneurship and Business 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 3116 Operations Research 3 30 -- 30 45
26

CSC 3112 Principles of Programming Languages 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3117 Emerging Trends in Computer Science 4 15 90 -- 60
2 Electives
CSC 3110 Database Management Systems II 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 3100 Modeling and Simulation 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 3105 Computer Graphics 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 3114 Selected Topics in Computer Science 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3115 Advanced Programming 3 30 -- 30 45
Semester 6
BIT 3204 Enterprise Network Management 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 3205 Compiler Design 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3206 Group Project 5 -- 135 -- 60
2 Electives
CSC 3207 Computer Security 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence & Data Warehousing 4 45 30 -- 60
BSE 3202 Distributed Systems Development 4 45 30 -- 60
6.2.3 Course Unit Description
CSC 1100: Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; Equip students with skills of using common office
applications; Expose students to different operating systems; Equip students with skills of how to use the Internet;
and equip students with knowledge about common text editors in different operating systems. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; describe the historical evolution
of computers; competently use the common office applications in at least two operating systems and competently
use common text editor in at least two operating systems.
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
CSK 1101 Communication Skills (4 CU)
Course Description: This course provides students with skills of effective communication. These include verbal,
written, and gesture. The course aims at facilitating students appropriately and clearly communicate with others. The
aims of the course unit are to: Improve the communication competencies of the student; Improve problem solving
strategies of students; improve the art of critical thinking within the student; improve the student’s ability to collect
and synthesize information; provide students with knowledge to utilize the library and other educational resources.
Indicative Content:
• Writing Skills: Thinking critically/selectively before the writing process; selecting the relevant details;
organizing the relevant details logically; writing the reports essays, letters and taking notes in appropriate
register; avoiding ambiguities, fallacies, irrationalities; providing supportive evidence; editing documents,
proof reading; writing and expanding information; Quoting and citing references; writing a curriculum
vitae.
27

• Reading Skills: The use of skimming; scanning inference and prediction in reading; Intensive and critical
reading; Acquisition of specific reading skills; Interpretation of non linear texts; Locating information and
comprehension.
• Speaking and Listening Skills to Enhance Effective Public Relations: The art of persuasion in effective
speaking; Conducting interviews; Conducting meetings; Participating in group discussions and tutorials;
Non verbal communication clues; Presentation seminars, seeking clarification etc.; Expression of
politeness; Public speaking; Proper listening skills.
• Examination Skills; Preparing for examinations: How much one gets from group discussions; Proper
revision; Understanding examination rubric; Budgeting time during examination process; Writing
examinations and following instructions
Reference Books:
i. B. Bough, 101 ways to improve your communication skills instantly, 4th edition, 2005.
ii. P. Klavs, The hard Truth About soft skills: Work Place Lessons Smart People wish they had learned sooner,
2008.
CSC 1104: Computer Organization & Architecture (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces the logical architecture and organization of computer systems. It
highlights the lower end operations in a typical computer as well as the way computers manage their resources
during operation. The course opens up a student to be an informed user of the computer rather than a passive
recipient of the computer services. Teaching will be in terms of lectures as well as tutorials. The aims of the course
are: To introduce to students the concepts of computer organization; to highlight to students the way computers
process and store the data; to highlight internal management issues in computer systems. By the end of the course,
the student will be able to know the organization, processing and storage mechanisms of computer systems.
Indicative Content: Data Representation; Integer Formats, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Systems, Negative
integers and 2’s Complement, Floating Point Formats, BCD, Formats, Alphanumeric Codes; Basic Digital Circuits:
Logic gates, Karnaugh maps, Combinatorial Circuits, Binary Adders, Multiplexers and Demultiplexers,
Comparators, Decoders and Encoders, Code Converters, ROMS and PLA’s, Sequential Circuits, Flip Flops and
Latches, R-S flip flops, J-K flip flops, T flip Flops, D flip flops, Registers, Shift Registers and Data Transmission,
Sequential Network Design. Micro Computer Architecture: CPU, Memory, I/O Devices and Interfaces, System Bus,
Examples of CPU Structures, The Intel / Pentium CPU, The Z-80 or Motorola, Machine Language Instructions,
Instruction Formats and Addressing Modes; The Processing Elements: Macroinstruction execution, Internal Bus
Transfers, Detailed Internal Architecture, Micro control, Hardwired; Control, Micro-programmed Control, Reduced
Instruction Set Computers; I/O Programming: Programmed I/O, Interrupt I/O, Polling, Priority Interrupt System,
Direct Memory Access, I/O processors; Memory Systems and Memory Management: Memory Hierarchy, Main
Memory, Auxiliary Memory, Associative Memory, Cache Memory, Virtual Memory, Memory Management
Hardware.
Reference Books:
i. M. M. Mano, Computer Systems Architecture, Prentice Hall, 1993.
ii. A. S. Tanebaum , Structured Computer Organization , Prentice Hall ,1984.
iii. G. B. Gibson, Computer Systems Concepts and Design, Prentice Hall, 1991.
iv. W. Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, Prentice Hall, 2003.
CSC 1105: Numerical Methods (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to sharpen the students’ skills in using numerical approaches to solve
mathematical/real life problems. The focus will be on the ability to correctly formulate numerical problems and
schemes that solve them. Emphasis will be put on the precision and robustness of the schemes. The course will be
taught theoretically. The developed schemes can be implemented and run in any programming language. The aims
of the course are; to provide a solid basis on the numerical approaches to computational problem solving; To
provide students with problem analysis and solving skills to be able to handle typical computational problems in
28

practice. By the end of the course, the student should be able to; Derive schemes for different set ups of numerical
problems; Test for convergence of different schemes; correctly use the schemes to generate solutions to the
numerical problems to the required precision.
Indicative Content: Numerical solutions to non linear equations; Numerical solutions for systems of linear
equations; Fast - Fourier transforms; Numerical differentiation; Numerical integration; Numerical solutions for
differential and difference equations.
Reference Books:
i. R. L. Burden and J. D. Faires, Numerical Analysis, Wardsworth, 1993.
ii. K. Kaw, E. E. Kalu and D. Nguyen, Numerical Methods with Applications, 2008.
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to create a strong base in the principles and practice of functional programming.
A high level programming language lie C is to be used. The students are to cover both theoretical principles and
hands on practical skills. The main concepts to cover include Programme structure, data structures, syntactical and
semantic correctness, planning and segmentation in programming as well as working with data files. The aims of the
course are to provide the student with: Comprehensive knowledge about structured oriented programming;
Knowledge in planning and organization of programming projects; Knowledge and techniques of evaluating
syntactic and semantic correctness of a computer Programme and; Strong practical basis in programming.
Indicative Content: Programme structure; Variables and Operators; Conditional statements; Looping statements;
Arrays and strings; Functions; Advanced data types; Pointers; Dynamic memory allocation and dynamic structures;
Working with files and GUI.
Reference Books:
i. B. W. Kernighan, D. M. Ritchie, C Programming Language, 2nd edition, 1989.
ii. S. P. Harbison, A Reference Manual , 5th edition, 2004.
CSC 1204 Research Methodology (3 CU)
Course Description: The purpose of this course is to acquaint students with types of scientific research relevant for
anyone working in the field of computer science. It will enable students to develop capacity to conduct small, simple
research projects while at the university. The aims of the course are to provide the student with: Enable students
become competent in understanding the research process. Provide skills that will enable students undertake
independent research using a variety of appropriate methods, using primary and secondary data, as well as
qualitative and quantitative techniques. Provide students with skills to produce a research proposal and highlight
ethical research practices to students.
Indicative Content: Introduction to scientific research; Formulating and clarifying the research topic and research
problem; Conducting a literature review; Different research approaches; Ethics in research; Sampling; Use of
secondary data; Collection methods for primary data; Analyzing qualitative data; Analyzing quantitative data and
writing a research proposal and project report.
Reference Books:
i. H. Cooper, Synthesizing Research: A Guide for Literature Reviews, Thousand Oaks California: Sage
Publications, 1998.
ii. M. Sounders, P. Lewis & A. Thornhill, Research Methods for Students, 3rd edition, UK, Financial times,
Prentice hall, 2003.
CSC 1206: Computational Mathematics (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives the students a strong mathematical base to be able to tackle other computer
problems. The course brings together mathematical topics which are commonly used in the general area of computer
science. It builds a foundation for other courses that need special mathematical backgrounds. The teaching will
largely involve lectures, together with tutorials and take home assignments The aims of the course are: To provide
29

students with a mathematical base that is to be used to solve computer science problems; To improve the problem
solving skills of students.
Indicative Content:
• Calculus; Sequences and limits; Limits of functions & continuity Advanced differential calculus
• Statistics; Discrete Random variables and distributions; Continuous distributions; Basics of Monte Carlo
simulations
• Further topics; Mathematics for image processing; Mathematics for signal processing
Reference Books:
i. G. B. Thomas and R. L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 9th edition, Addison Wesley, 1995.
ii. R. E. Walpole, Introduction to Statistics, 3 rd edition, Prentice Hall, 1982.
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to give an in depth understanding of Object Oriented programming. It is to cater
for Object Oriented Programming practices like inheritance, interfaces, exception handling, action handling,
security, software reuse and robustness. The aim of the course is to: Move the students’ programming skills from
basic to advanced; Avail students with skills to handle non functional Programme aspects like robustness and
security and train students to develop complete computer applications.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference Books:
i. J. Lewis and W. Loftus, Java Software Solution: Foundations of Programme Design, 4th edition, 2008.
ii. K. A. Mughal and R. W. Rasmussen, A Programmer’s Guide to Java TM Certification: A comprehensive
Primer, 3rd edition, 2008.
CSC 1208: Individual Project I (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is to give students an experience of developing simple but complete applications.
Focus will be put on programming and Programme documentations as well as realization of the objectives. The aims
of the course are: To practically give students skills of integrating different concepts of programming into a single
application; To introduce the student to hands on aspects of software development; To nurture the student’s ability
to independently read different sources of literature so as to identify what (s)he can use to develop his/her
application.
Indicative Content: The main content in the course is translation of a real life problem into a working computer
Programme.
References: Students can read any literature like books and online tutorials that can help in addressing the problem
in the project at hand.
CSC 1209 Logic Programming (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces a paradigm where computation arises from proof search in logic
according to a fixed, predictable strategy. It thereby unifies logical specification and implementation in a way that is
quite different from functional or imperative programming. This course provides a thorough, modern introduction to
logic programming. It introduces the basic concepts and techniques of logic programming followed by successive
refinement towards more efficient implementations or extensions to richer logical concepts. It covers a variety of
logics and operational interpretations. The aim of the course is to provide a basic introduction to the logic
Programming language and Prolog. It aims at introducing a number of logical systems of importance in computer
science.
30

Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference Books:
i. M. R. Huth and M. D. Ryan, Logic in Computer Science, Modelling and Reasoning about Systems,
Cambridge University Press, 2000.
ii. SWI Prolog Home page, http://www.swi-prolog.org/
CSC 1301: Practical Skills Development (4 CU)
Course Content: The course aims at imparting practical skills in areas chosen by the faculty. The students are to be
supervised by staff with in the faculty. Areas of practical skills development include; Implementation of projects;
Network and system administration; Hardware maintenance and Computer assembly.
This can be done within the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology or any other unit in Makerere
University. Students will write a report at the end of the course.
CSC 1303: Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited) (5 CU)
Course Content: In this course, students will cover the course content of the CCNA international curriculum.
CSC 2100: Data Structures and Algorithms (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion the students should be able to: Demonstrate factual knowledge
including the mathematical notation, syntax and terminology used in the course; describe the fundamental principles
including the laws and theorems arising from the concepts covered in this course; Apply course material along with
techniques and procedures covered in this course to solve practical problems; Design simple algorithms and data
structures in C and use theories and concepts covered in the course to approximate the complexities of algorithms.
Indicative Content: Methods for modularizing, documenting and constructing Programmes (abstract data types/
object orientation), and an introduction to classical data structures and algorithms with complexity analysis.
Application and implementation of strings, arrays, stacks queues, lists, trees and graphs; Abstract data types; storage
management; Sorting, searching, merging, reference and cross-referencing files; Design and analysis of algorithms,
complexity of algorithms, big-O and small-O notation. Binary trees, B-trees, B*-trees, and AVL-trees; Study of disk
and tape file organizations; Creation of sequential, direct, and indexed sequential files; Hashing techniques and
address overflows; Primary and secondary key usage, inverted and linked-list files; Semantic Nets, frames.
Reference Books:
i. A. V. Aho, J. D. Ullman, J. E. Hopcroft, Data Structures and Algorithms, Addison-Wesley, 1983.
ii. A. V. Aho, The Design and Analysis of Computer Algorithms, Addison-Wesley, Longman, 1974.
iii. T. H. Cormen, C. E. Leiserson, R. L. Rivest, and C. Stein, Introduction to Algorithms, 2nd edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
BSE 2105 Formal Methods (4 CU)
Course Description: The course provides students with skills of solving generic formal problems in science. It
covers the intellectual and practical skills necessary for problem formalization.
Students will be provided with factual knowledge including the mathematical notations and terminologies used in
formalizing scientific problems; fundamental principles including the laws and theorems arising from the concepts
covered in this course; They will be able to apply course material along with techniques and procedures to solve
practical problems; The course will provide them programming skills by writing numerical Programmes like Matlab
Programmes, to solve numerical problems.
31

Indicative Content:
• Predicate Logic Specification: Foundations; Basic concepts; Verification; Z; Tools and systems; Z
animation Miranda and ZANS; Nitpick and the Z Notation.
• Algebraic Specification: Foundations; Basic concepts; Verification; Tools and systems; Miranda; The OBJ
family of languages; LARCH
Reference Books:
i. A. Diller, Z: an Introduction to Formal Methods, 2nd edition, Wiley, 1994.
ii. M. Huth and M. Ryan, Logic in Computer Science: Modelling and Reasoning about Systems, Cambridge
University Press; 2nd edition, 2004.
iii. R. Gupta, L. Guernic, P. S .K. Shukla, and J. P. Talpin,, Formal Methods and Models for System Design:
A System Level Perspective, 2004.
CSC 2109: Discrete Mathematics (3 CU)
Course Description: The course applies mathematics to finite or discontinuous quantities in order to master the
process of problem-solving, communication, reasoning, and modeling. It gives a basic understanding of
mathematical structures that are fundamentally discrete. Objects studied in discrete mathematics are largely
countable sets such as integers, finite graphs, and formal languages. Applications of such concepts to computer
science are to be studied. Concepts and notations from discrete mathematics are useful in studying and describing
objects and problems in computer algorithms and programming languages. The aim of this course is to provide the
student with: - a basic understanding of mathematical objects that assume only distinct, separate values, rather than
values on a continuum; the main ideas studied in the broad area of Discrete Mathematics especially clear algorithmic
aspects; an understanding of what the relation between problems is.
Indicative Content: Logics and set theory; Number theory; Relations and functions; Languages; Finite state
machines (and optionally Finite state automata); Groups and Modulo Arithmetic; Number of solutions of a linear
equation; Recurrence relations; Searching algorithms.
Reference Books:
i. L. S. Bobrow, and M. A. Arbib, Discrete Mathematics: Applied Algebra for Computer and Information
Science Philadelphia, PA: Saunders, 1974.
ii. J. A. Dossey, A. D. Otto, L. Spence, and C. V. Eynden, Discrete Mathematics, 3rd edition. Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley, 1997.
iii. V. K. Balakrishnan, Introductory Discrete Mathematics, New York: Dover, 1997.
CSC 2111: Database Management Systems I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is to provide students with a strong foundation in systematic approaches to design
and implementing of database applications. Preliminarily, operations like requirements gathering and database
planning will be covered. The course will also introduce students to developing of application Programmes that talk
to the database. These applications may be online or offline. The aims of the course are to: Provide a background for
the evolution of database (management) systems; Provide the students with the steps one has to go through when
developing good database applications; Give hand on experience and knowledge in developing database (driven)
applications
Indicative content: Background to databases; Evolution of database systems; Database organization and
architecture; Data base models; Over view of database application development; The database development life
cycle; Database design; Conceptual design; Logical design; Physical Design; Querying databases; SQL/PL SQL
and Scripting.
32

Reference Books:
i. T. Connolly and C. Begg, Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management, 2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 2004.
CSC 2113: Software Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces students to the foundations of software engineering as a discipline.
Students are introduced to the evolving role of software engineering, especially with emphasis on software
engineering process and process models. Key topics covered include Software configuration management,
Requirement analysis, Software Specification, Design methods, Software testing, Software project management
techniques; Software project planning, Risk management; Software Quality Assurance; Software reuse; and
Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
Indicative Content
• Evolving role of software, software characteristics; Systems and environment; system engineering
hierarchy, information and knowledge engineering; Information strategy; Business Area analysis, modeling
enterprise and business-level data modeling, system architecture and associated information flow; writing
system specification.
• Software Engineering as a layered technology: Software process, software process models. Software
configuration management: the SCM process, Identification of objects in software configuration, version
control, change control, configuration audit, SCM standards.
• Requirement analysis: Communication techniques, Information gathering tools; organizing and structuring
information; analysis principles; Analysis modeling.
• Software Specification: Design process, principles and concepts: Abstraction, refinement, modularity,
control hierarchy, structural partitioning, information hiding, functional independence, cohesion, coupling,
design heuristics;
• Design methods: data design, architectural design, transform mapping, design optimization, human
computer interface design, procedural design and tools; Design documentation.
• Software testing: Testing objectives, Testing principles, Testability, test case designing, white box testing;
Basis path testing: Condition testing, data flow testing, loop testing; Black box testing: graph based testing
methods, equivalence partitioning, Boundary value analysis, comparison testing; Testing documentation
and help facilities; Software testing strategy: unit testing, integration testing, validation testing, system
testing.
• Software project management techniques: project metrics, software measurement and metrics, software
quality metrics;
• Software project planning: objectives of planning, resources, project estimation and estimation models,
project decomposition techniques, make-buy decisions; automated estimation tools.
• Risk management: software risks, risk identification, risk projection, risk mitigation, monitoring and
management; Project Scheduling: people and effort relationships, defining tasks, defining task network,
scheduling techniques; Software teams and intra-team relationships; role of project manager.
• Software Quality Assurance: Concept of quality, quality control vs. quality assurance, cost of quality,
factors that affect quality, quantitative view of quality, quality metrics, defect removal efficiency SQA
activities, ISO standards and CMM practices, SEI levels, Software reviews, Formal approaches to SQA,
Statistical Quality Assurance. Software reliability, reliability metrics, reliability models, meeting reliability
requirements.
• Effective metrics for software process: Measurement principles, attributes of software metrics, metrics for
analysis model, metrics for design model, metrics for source code, metrics for maintenance.
• Software reuse: difficulties in reuse, hardware reuse vs. software reuse, reusable artifacts, domain
33

engineering approach, analysis design and construction of reusable components, classification and retrieval
of components, economic impact of reuse and reuse metrics.
• Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Peters, W. Pedrycz, Software Engineering: An Engineering approach, John Wiley, 2000.
ii. R. S. Pressman, Software Engineering: A Practitioners Approach, 5th edition, McGraw Hill, 2005.
iii. I. Sommerville, Software engineering, 8th edition, Addison Wesley, 2008.
iv. D. Ghezzi, M. Jazayeri, D. Mandrioli, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
CSC 2114 Artificial Intelligence (3 CU)
Course Description: This course examines the concepts, techniques, applications, and theories of Artificial
Intelligence. The focus of the course is on the theory and application of artificial intelligence. Topics include logic,
search, and reasoning with an emphasis on fundamentals and recent advances in AI. Given the broad range of topics
addressed by the AI field, topics for discussion must, necessarily, be limited. Therefore, this course will focus on
issues of search, knowledge representation, and reasoning, decision making and learning from the perspective of an
intelligent agent.
Indicative Content:
• Introduction to Artificial Intelligence: Simulation of Intelligence behavior, in different areas;
• Problem solving: games, natural language question answering, visual perception, learning; Aim-oriented
(heuristic) algorithms versus solution-guaranteed algorithms.
• Understanding Natural Languages: Parsing techniques, context free and transformational grammars,
transition nets, augmented transition nets, grammar-free analyzers, sentence generation.
• Knowledge Representation: First-order predicate calculus; PROLOG and LISP languages; Semantic nets;
partitioned nets; Production rules; knowledge base, the inference system, forward and backward deduction.
• Expert System: Existing systems (DENDRAL, MYCIN), Domain exploration; Meta-knowledge, expertise
transfer, self explaining systems.
• Pattern Recognition Structured Descriptions: Symbolic description, m
• Machine perception, line finding, interpretation, semantics and models, object identification and speech
recognition.
Reference Books:
i. R. Duda, P. Hart, Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis, Wiley, 1973.
ii. E. A. Feigenbaum, J. Feldman; Computers and Thoughts, AAAI Press, 1995.
iii. N. J. Jilsson, Problem Solving Methods in Artificial Intelligence, McGraw-Hill, 1971.
iv. J. Lloyd, Foundation of Logic Programming, Springer-Verlag, 1993
CSC 2200: Operating Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: Operating Systems course introduces students to software that controls hardware and makes
the hardware usable. Its interaction with other computer devises and how it controls other computer processes is
explored. The Course aims at providing students with a detailed understanding of how operating systems work;
skills to write basic Programmes to utilize underlying operating system infrastructures. At the end of the course,
students are able to know the dominant categories of operating systems are Windows and UNIX (Linux, Mac OS,
Solaris, etc). Students of operating systems are expected to have a proper understanding of the differences between
these two. Students should be able to understand different design principles for operating systems and various
software tools that make operating systems usable.
34

Indicative Content; Operating Systems Structures; Processes and threads; Thread creation, manipulation and
synchronization; Deadlock; Implementing Synchronization operations; CPU scheduling; Memory management;
File systems and file system implementation; Monitors; Segments; Disk Scheduling; Networking; UDP and TCP.
Reference Book:
i. W. Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 5th edition, Prentice Hall, 2005.
BSE 2203 Computer Networks & Data Communication (4 CU)
Course Description: This course examines principles, design, implementation, and performance of computer
networks and data communication. The aim is to sharpen student’s understanding and skills in computer networking
and data communication. Subjects for discussion include: Internet protocols and routing, local area networks, wide
area networking, wireless communications and networking, performance analysis, congestion control, TCP, network
address translation, multimedia over IP, switching and routing, mobile IP, peer-to-peer networking, network
security, and other current research topics and technologies.
Indicative Content: Network services and applications: DNS, HTTP, SMTP, peer-to-peer systems; Network
transport architectures, TCP, UDP, TCP congestion control; Routing and forwarding, intra-domain, inter-domain
routing algorithms
and Mobile IP; Link layers and local area networks, Ethernet, WiFi, and mobility; Multimedia communications and
quality of service; Network measurement, inference, and management; Network security (ACL, IPSec, etc);
Network programming Network experimentation and performance analysis; Protocol verification.
Reference Books;
i. J. F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, Computer Networking – A Top Down Approach Featuring the Internet, 3rd
edition, Addison- Wesley, 2004.
ii. L. Peterson and B. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1999.
CSC 2209: Systems Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: Systems programming is aimed at teaching students how to write Programmes using system
level services. The system of instruction is UNIX due to availability of free system tools that have been largely
developed by and for the academia. The course is aimed at giving students skills in tools provided by systems, their
commands, system calls and understanding for model of computation.
Indicative Content: Introduction and Unix Standardization; File input and output; Standard I/O Library; Files and
Directories; System Data Files and Information; Process Environment; Process Control; Process Relationships;
Signals; Threads; Advanced I/O and Inter process Communication
Reference Book:
i. W. R. Stevens, Advanced programming in the Unix Environment, Addison-Wesley, 2008.
CSC 2210 Automata, Complexity and Computability (3 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces students to the concept of automata and complexity. It sets a
background for more advanced studies like compiler construction and principles of programming languages. The
aims of the course are: To introduce students to the concepts of complexity, automata and computability; to prepare
students for advanced studies in compiler construction and principle of programming languages;
Indicative content: Finite state machines and regular languages: Deterministic and non deterministic machines;
Equivalence and minimization; Regular expressions and regular grammars; Kleene’s theorem. Push-down automata
and context free grammars; Normal forms of grammars; Top-down and bottom-up parsing; Turing machines and
computability; Church’s thesis; NP-Computable problems.
35

Reading Books:
i. J. E. Hopcroft, R. Motwani, J. D. Ullman, Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages, and
Computation; Addison Wesley, 2000.
ii. I. A. D. Cohen, Introduction to Computer Theory; John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1996.
CSC 2212 Individual Project II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to strengthen the students’ hand on skills on integration of the different skills
into a programming project. Students are expected to develop a running computer application bigger in size and
more polished than in CSC 1208 Individual Project I. More emphasis will be put on creativity, robustness, data
validation, security and completeness. The aims of the course are: To provide an avenue for students to integrate
different subject areas into a single application; To sharpen the students problem solving skills; To improve
student’s ability to read on his/her own as an avenue for solving a certain real life problem.
Indicative Content: The content of this course is to be determined by the problem the student intends to address.
Reference: Students will be required to read any literature related to the project at hand.
BSE 2201 Network Applications Development (3 CU)
Course Description: This course gives students theoretical principles and hands on experience of developing
network applications. It caters for functional and non functional issues peculiar to network applications. These
include security, robustness and performance. The aim of the course is to: Give students’ theoretical and practical
skills of developing network applications; Equip students with security and performance aspects of network based
applications; expand the applications of students programming skills.
Indicative Content: Design principles for network-based applications; Design and development of Java Servlets,
JSP, Web services and NET; Principles of information security in network-based applications; http and https
protocols.
Reference Book:
i. M. Hall, Core Servlets and Java Server Pages, Volume 1: Core Technologies, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,
2000.
CSC 2214 Cryptology and Coding Theory (3 CU)
Course Description: This course provides a foundation for further studies in information security. The course
introduces students to the exciting fields of cryptology and coding theory. Fundamentally, it deals with the
mathematics that underlies modern cryptology. Cryptology combines the studies of cryptography, the creating of
masked messages, and cryptanalysis, the unraveling of masked messages. Coding theory is the study of coding
schemes used to detect and correct errors that occur during the data transmission. The aims of this course are; To
understand the building blocks of crypto systems and error correction; To gain historical understanding of the
evolution of crypto systems; To develop tools necessary to crypto analyze crypto systems; To gain insights in the
practical application of cryptology and error correction in the modern information age; To understand the goals and
trade-offs associated with encryption and error-control coding systems.
Indicative Content: History of cryptology and coding theory; Shift registers Classical crypto-systems; Stream
ciphers; Block ciphers; Information theory; Crypto analysis techniques; Introduction to Elliptic curve cryptography;
Basic Algebra; Coding theory fundamentals; Linear codes; Hamming codes; Secret sharing schemes; Introduction
to Complexity; Hash functions; PGP & PKI Deffie-hellman key exchange protocol.
36

Reference Books:
i. A. Menezes, P. V. Oorschot, and S. Vanstone, Handbook of Applied Cryptography, CRC Press, Trappe &
Washington, 1996.
ii. Trappe and Washington, Introduction to Cryptography with Coding Theory, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall,
2006.
iii. S. Singh, The Code Book, Doubleday, 1999.
iv. S. S. Adams, Introduction to Algebraic Coding Theory with Gap, 2005.
CSC 2301 Industrial Training (4 CU)
Course Description: During Industrial training, students are to go and work in an organization with an IT
department. The student is to be under the supervision of one of the workers in the organization. The student is
assigned duties in line with the operations of the organization. Staff from Makerere University will make visits to
get the students’ view of the organization as well as the organization’s view about the student. The supervisor will
be given a form to evaluate the students and the student will make a report about his experience. The two reports
will be used to evaluate the student.
CSC 3103: User Interface Design (4 CU)
Course Description The course introduces the principles of user interface development, focusing on design,
implementation and evaluation. The course aims at providing different skills to students, such as: Developing
efficient, flexible and interactive User Interfaces (UI); Provide ability to identifying system users, the tasks they
want to carry out and the environment in which they will be working; Creating a conceptual designs; Designing
various kinds of UI, in particular graphical user interfaces (GUIs) and websites; evaluating UIs; Appreciation of
realities of developing usable UIs in an organization.
Indicative Content: Usability; User-Centered Design; UI Software Architecture; Human Capabilities; Output
Models; Conceptual Models and Metaphors; Input Models; Design Principles; Paper Prototyping; Constraints and
Layouts; Graphic Design; Computer Prototyping; Heuristic Evaluation; User Testing; Experiment Design and
Experiment Analysis.
Reference Books:
i. D. A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things, New York, NY: Doubleday, 1990.
ii. J. Nielsen, Usability Engineering, Burlington, MA: Academic Press, 1994.
iii. K, Mullet, and D. Sano, Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication Oriented Techniques. Prentice Hall,
1994.
CSC 3110 Database Management Systems II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students advanced knowledge in the operation of database management
systems. Operational aspects like speed and security are to be extensively addressed. Internal operations of database
management systems like indexing, query processing and transactions are to be covered. These are to create a strong
basis for future advanced studies/research. The course is to equip students with fundamental knowledge of the
operation of database systems and how they interact with the operating system.
Indicative Content: Enhanced ER modeling, Tuning (operational) systems to improve performance, advanced
scripting, Data validation, Relational algebra and Relational calculus, Low level output representation using
relational calculus, Query processing, Transactions management, Indexing and hashing.
Reference Book:
i. R. Elmasri, and S. B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th edition, Benjamin/Cummings,
2003.
37

CSC 3116 Operations Research (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to introduce students to the broad concepts of operations research. Students will
learn how to interpret and analyze problems, formulate them as problems and use existing techniques to solve them.
The course will improve students’ problem solving skills by subjecting them to real life problems and guide them
through formulation of their solutions. The choice of the cases chosen depends on their applicability in real life
computing environment. By the end of the course, the student should be able to; Correctly formalize real life
problems into OR problems, Adequately solve typical OR problems, Make post optimality analysis on OR solutions,
Teaching and Learning Pattern Teaching will be in form of lectures and Tutorials
Indicative Content; Linear programming; Network Analysis; Decision trees and Markov processes
Reference Books:
i. M. S. Bazaraa, J. J. Jarvis and H. D. Sherali, Linear Programming and Network Flows, John Wiley,
2005.
ii. W. L. Winston, Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms, Wadsworth Publishing Company,
1997.
CSC 3112: Principles of Programming Languages (3 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces students to the low level organization and operation of programming
languages. It covers semantic and syntactic as well as operational issues in programming languages. The building
blocks of programming languages are explored. The course gives students fundamental knowledge in the
organization and operation of programming languages. Students learn to appreciate the possible future evolutions of
programming languages. It exposes students to causes of operational (like performance, security, etc) characteristics
of programming languages. By the end of the course, students will be able to understand common language
paradigms; know the different building blocks of a programming language; know how the different blocks of a
programming language interact
Indicative Content:
• Overview over programming language paradigms; Common principles: syntax, syntax trees, formal
semantics (denotation and operational), variables and binding
• Types: role of types in programming and programming languages, types and their operations: products,
sums, functions, recursive types, reference and array types
• Primarily imperative issues: control flow, arrays, pointers and references, parameter-passing mechanisms,
scoping
• Type systems: strongly typed languages type checking (static vs. dynamic), type equivalence (by name vs.
structural), overloading, coercion, polymorphism, type inference
• Binding: declarations and environments. Block structure: scope and visibility, stack discipline. Bound
occurrences: static vs. dynamic binding.
• Encapsulation: information hiding, modules, abstract data types, classes
• Language implementation: parsing, code generation, garbage collection.
Reference Books:
i. D. P. Friedman, M. Wand, and C. T. Haynes, Essentials of Programming Languages, MIT Press, 2001.
CSC 3117 Emerging Trends in Computer Science (4 CU)
Course Description: The course is to expose provide students with an opportunity to search for knowledge in an
area of interest. It is to allow a student do lightweight research and explore the current trends in a certain computer
science area. The course will aid a student get an in depth understanding of the developments in one area of
computer science, improve the student’s research skills and develop confidence in the students on the ability to
search for knowledge with little guidance.
38

Indicative Content:
The content is not specific but will be dependent on the area the student chooses to pursue.
BIS 3100: Modeling and Simulation (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students theoretical and practical skills in modeling and simulation of
dynamic systems with a view of learning their behavior and the sensitivity of that behavior to certain parameters.
The course will familiarize students with modeling and simulation techniques that are applicable under varying
circumstances equip students with practical experiences of composing models and running simulations under
varying circumstances, equip students with skills of correctly representing simulation results
Indicative Content: Simulation of operational systems, Simulation as a decision making methodology, Model
development and validation, Design of simulation experiments, Generation of appropriate values of random
variables, Interactive procedures and interpretation of results.
Reference Books:
i. L. Oakshott, Business Modelling and Simulation, Trans- Atlantic Publications, 1997.
ii. R. G. Coyle, System dynamics modeling a practical approach, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 1996.
CSC 3105 Computer Graphics (3 CU)
Course Description: The course covers general purpose graphics systems and their use. It gives an in-depth
knowledge of computer graphics and graphical user interfaces. The course introduces students to the concepts of
graphical representation on computers, teaches students the design of good graphical user interfaces.
Indicative Content: Students are exposed to Graphics hardware, Geometrical transformations, Surface and volume
visualization, Design and implementation of graphical user interfaces, Two dimensional imaging processes,
Computer graphics applications, Display system organization; Display devices and modes; Display file construction
and its structure; Graphic primitive - device initialization, view porting and windowing; Line drawing, simple and
symmetrical Digital Differential Analysis (DDA); Arch and circle generating DDA Line; and polygon clipping
algorithms; Curve plotting; Transformations- projections and perspective views; Picture segmentation: Graphics
standards - PHIGS and GKS.
Reference Books:
i. D. Foley, A. Van Dam, S. K. Feiner, J. F. Hughes and R. L. Phillips, Introduction to Computer
Graphics, James, Addison Wesley, 2003.
ii. P. Shirley, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, AK Peters, 2002.
CSC 3114: Selected Topics in Computer Science (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to give an avenue for visiting or local staff to design content for an area that they
are researching in but not covered in the curriculum. This could be an upcoming field yet to be incorporated in the
curriculum or some outstanding state of practice in a certain computer science area.
This course aims at providing an avenue for exposing students to new interesting areas of computer science which
are not (yet) incorporated into the curriculum.
CSC 3115 Advanced Programming (3 CU)
Course Description: This course highlights programming practices that are vital in the day today work of a
programming professional. While many systems are described by functionalities, some important aspects like
security, robustness, and maintainability are ignored. Students are to get an in-depth understanding of these concepts
as well as exploring the current trends in the programming environment. This course will concretize the student’s
past programming experience as well as highlighting critical practices in programming that are necessary for a
professional programmer. Therefore, after this course, the student should be able to implement non functional but
critical aspects of programming like robustness and security, develop well documented and well structured software
39

that can easily be maintained, be knowledgeable in other programming practices like mobile programming, be aware
of newer programming paradigms like service oriented and cloud computing.
Indicative Content: Programming for Security: Programming for Robustness; Programming for Maintainability;
Trends in Programming Paradigms
Reference Book:
i. W. R. Stevens and S. A. Rago, Advanced Programming in the UNIX Environment, Addison Wesley,
1992.
BIT 3102 Entrepreneurship and Business (3 CU)
Course Description: This course offers an overview of the entrepreneurial process. Students will develop a
business plan using their own business idea. They will learn skills and characteristics of successful entrepreneurs,
techniques for evaluating business opportunities, planning tools, selling and marketing basics, financial analysis,
record keeping, laws and regulations of Uganda, and step by step procedures for starting a small business.
Indicative Content:
• Identification of talents and skills required to be a successful entrepreneur; Personal talents; Technical
skills; Educational background
• Overview of business opportunities: Trade association reports; Government reports; Demographic
information and Surveys.
• Business entry strategies: Steps in starting a business; Purpose of business; Description of business;
Starting a business versus buying a business
• Planning: Setting goals; Operational approach.
• Laws and regulations affecting a small business in Uganda: CAP and Local bye laws
• Sources of information and assistance; Trade association and other non-governmental sources; Local, state,
and federal governmental sources; Small business analysis
• Description of a comprehensive business plan; Reason for preparing a business plan; Types of business
plans; Form of business plan; Contents of a successful business plan.
• Outline of a business plan: Preparation of an executive summary; Establishment of company strategy;
Development of a marketing plan; Sales strategy; financial plan.
• Completion of the business plan; Writing the plan; Outside review of the plan.
• Social and Ethical Responsibility
Reference Books:
i. B. R. Barringer & R. D. Ireland, Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New ventures. Published by
Pearson-Prentice Hall. 1st edition, 2006.
ii. T. W. Zimmerer and N. M. Scarborough, Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management,
4th edition, 2005.
BIT 3204 Enterprise Network Management (4 CU)
Course Description: The course is to equip students with knowledge of managing enterprise computer/data
networks. This caters for enterprise critical aspects like reliability, security and user management.
The course aims at equipping students with skills to plan, manage and monitor large computer networks.
Indicative Content: The infrastructure for network management, the internet and ISO models, SNMP, ASN.1,
Structure of management information and MIB, Events and managed objects. EMS vs. NMS NOC; Remote and
Web-based management tool; OAM&P Focus, Operation, maintenance, performance monitoring and Introduction of
traffic engineering and load balancing.
40

Reference Book:
i. K. Terplan, Effective Management of Local Area Networks, McGeaw-Hill, 1992.
CSC 3205 Compiler Design (3 CU)
Course Description: In this course unit, students shall understand the complete process of translating a Programme
in a high-level language to machine language. The course gives an introduction to the design and implementation of
a compiler with emphasis on principles and techniques for program analysis and translation. It also gives an
overview of the tools for compiler construction, Lexical analysis, token selection, transition diagrams, and finite
automata. The use of context-free grammars to describe syntax, derivations of parse trees, and construction of
parsers, Syntax directed translation schemes; Intermediate code; Symbol table; Code generation; Detection,
reporting, recovery and correction of errors.
Indicative Content: Language translators: Introduction to compilers and interpreters; The structure of a compiler:
lexical analysis, parsing, semantic analysis; Intermediate code generation, register allocation, global optimization;
Lexical scanning; Parsing; Automatic parser construction. FIRST and FOLLOW functions; LL(1) parsers; LR
parsers. Conflicts in LR grammars and how to resolve them; Semantic analysis: Attributes and their computation,
tree-traversals, visibility and name resolution; inherited attributes and symbol tables. Name resolution in blockstructured
languages; Type checking: Type systems, varieties of strong typing, overload resolution, polymorphism
and dynamic dispatching. Type checking and type inference, unification; Run-time or Run-time organization:
storage allocation, non-local references, parameter passing, dynamic storage allocation. Exception handling,
debugging information; Intermediate code generation: control structures, expressions, simple register allocation.
Aggregates and other high-level constructs; Global optimization
Reference Book:
i. W. M. Waite and G. Goos, Compiler Construction, Springer Verlag, 1994.
CSC 3206 Group Project (5 CU)
Course Description: The course is to allow students, in groups, to integrate the knowledge acquired over the
previous five semesters into solving a non trivial problem through a computer application. Emphasis will be put on
the systematic development methodology, the documentation of the development process, and how well the
developed system addresses the problem to be solved. Non functional attributes like robustness, usability, security
and reliability will also be tested. The course will give students experience in Group and collaborative work, Proper
procedures in development of computer systems, Proper documentation of the software development process,
Development of big not trivial computer projects. The content is to be determined by the students under the
guidance of the supervisor.
CSC 3207 Computer Security (3 CU)
Course Description: Computer security is a branch of technology concerned with digital security or information
security applied to computers. Since the largest part of the computer that users interact with is software, computer
security pays big attention to development of secure software. Students will be conversant with threats faced by
computers in the connected digital world, techniques that are used to protect computers against various threats.
Indicative Content: Digital security principles, Hardware based security mechanisms, Secure operating systems,
Security architecture, Security by design, Secure coding (Software Security), Access Control Lists and Security
Applications.
Reference Books:
i. R. J. Anderson, Security Engineering: A Guide to Building Dependable Distributed Systems, Willey
2001.
ii. R. C. Seacord, Secure Coding in C and C++, Addison Wesley, 2005.
41

BIT 3200 Business Intelligence and Data Warehousing (4 CU)
Course Description: This course covers techniques and software tools that can assist management that deals with
large amounts of data in management and business decision making. The course covers the fundamental differences
between databases and data warehouses, the techniques of developing data warehouses as well as manipulating them
to generate business strategic decisions. Students will be able to understand the role and operation of data
warehouses, be equipped with skills of developing, maintaining, and manipulating data warehouses to generate
information for business decision making.
Indicative Content: Data warehouse concepts: partitioning, granularity, record of source, and metadata; Building
viable decision support environments; Architect development, Data migration and integration, Use of operational
data stores, and transactional systems.
Reference Book:
i. P. Ponniah, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, Wiley, 2001.
BSE 3202: Distributed Systems Development (4 CU)
Course Description: This course gives students theoretical and practical skills on development of distributed
systems and applications. This includes distributed system-specific challenges like reliability and robustness.
Students will be equipped with skills of developing distributed systems.
Indicative Content; Event-driven software architectures, Distributed object computing, Development,
documentation and testing of distributed applications, Techniques for reusable, extensible and efficient software
systems, Maintainability and concurrence in distributed systems, Abstraction based on patterns and object-oriented
techniques
Reference Books:
i. S. Tanenbaum and M. V. Steen, Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms, 2nd edition, Prentice
Hall, 2006.
ii. R. Anderson, Security Engineering: A Guide to Building Dependable Distributed Systems, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001.
6.3 Computer Science Subject for BSc Programme
6.3.1 Overview
The BSC Programme is housed in the Faculty of Science. It is a broad Programme that explores a wide range of
knowledge in Natural Sciences and other related disciplines. The Programme is subject based. Some of the subjects
like Botany, Mathematics, Physics, Zoology, and Biochemistry are housed in the Faculty its self. However, some
subjects like Computer Science, Geography, Statistics and Economics are housed in other faculties. The Faculty of
Computing and Informatics Technology houses the Computer Science subject. The department of Computer Science
is responsible over the day today running of the subject. All administrative and academic decisions on the subject
are done in consultation with the Faculty of Science.
6.3.2 The Computer Science Subject
It has been an aspiration of Makerere University to be a mover in the information age. This is done by training
highly skilled computer professionals. As a starting point, Computer Science as a subject was started in the Faculty
of Science in the early 1990’s. Its teaching was later transferred to the Institute of Computer Science (now Faculty
of Computing and Informatics Technology). The subject is offered by students on the Bachelor of Science
Programme and is done with other subjects in the Faculty of Science. This includes teaching as well as devising
ways the contents can be enriched further to match the current ICT trends. Students have an option of taking
Computer Science as a Major or a Minor as a subject.
42

1. Subject Combinations
Computer science subject forms part of the Bachelor of Science Programme. It has to be done with two other
subjects at enrollment. Due to the nature of Computer Science, it shares a lot with Mathematics. Therefore a
candidate have to demonstrate a strong mathematics background (for example good grades from A-Level) to be
offered the subject.
2. Admission Requirements
A student has to satisfy the general university admission requirements as well as those specific ones on the BSC
Programme. Particularly for Computer Science, a student must have a principle pass in Mathematics at A’ level
3. Graduation Load
Computer Science forms a portion of the overall load on the BSC Programme. The minimum graduation load for
BSC is 108 Credit units. Consultation with Faculty of Science showed that a majoring student needs between 66 and
72 credit units while a minor student needs between 30 and 36 CU for graduation.
6.3.4 Programme Structure
A.) Computer Science Major
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
CSC 1209 Logic Programming 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 3
CSC 2100 Algorithms and Data Structures 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 2113 Software Engineering 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 4 (Core)
CSC 2200 Operating Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 4 (2 electives)
CSC 2209 Systems Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2210 Automata, Complexity & Computability 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 2214 Cryptology and Coding Theory 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 5 (Core)
CSC 3103 User Interface Design 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 5 (2 electives)
CSC 3112 Principles of Programming Languages 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 3100 Modeling and Simulation 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 3105 Computer Graphics 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 3115 Advanced Programming 3 30 -- 30 45
Semester 6 (Core)
CSC 3206 Group Project 5 -- 135 -- 60
Semester 6 (2 electives)
CSC 3205 Compiler Design 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3207 Computer Security 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence & Data Warehousing 4 45 30 -- 60
43

BSE 3202 Distributed Systems Development 4 45 30 -- 60
B.) Computer Science Minor
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
CSC 1209 Logic Programming 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 3
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 2113 Software Engineering 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 4 (Core)
CSC 2200 Operating Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 4 (1 elective)
CSC 2210 Automata, Complexity & Computability 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 2214 Cryptology and Coding Theory 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 5 (Core)
CSC 3103 User Interface Design 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 5 (1 elective)
CSC 3112 Principles of Programming Languages 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3105 Computer Graphics 3 30 -- 30 45
Semester 6
CSC 3205 Compiler Design 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 3207 Computer Security 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence & Data Warehousing 4 45 30 -- 60
BSE 3202 Distributed Systems Development 4 45 30 -- 60
6.3.4 Course Unit Description
CSC 1100: Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; office applications; expose students to different
operating systems and equip students with skills of how to use the Internet. By the end of the course unit, the student
should be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; the historical evolution of computers; competently use
the common office applications in at least two operating systems;
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
44

Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
CSC 1106: Programming Methodology I (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to create a strong base in the principles and practice of functional programming.
A high level programming language like C is to be used. Students are to cover both theoretical principles and hands
on practical skills. The main concepts to cover include program structure, data structures, syntactical and semantic
correctness, planning and segmentation in programming as well as working with files. The aims of the course are to
provide the student with: Comprehensive knowledge about structured oriented programming; Knowledge in
planning and organization of programming projects; Knowledge and techniques of evaluating syntactic and semantic
correctness of a computer program and strong practical basis in programming.
Indicative Content: Programme structure; Variables and Operators; Conditional statements; Looping statements;
Arrays and strings; Functions; Advanced data types; Pointers; Dynamic memory allocation and dynamic structures;
Working with files and GUI.
Reference Books:
i. B. W. Kernighan, D. M. Ritchie, C Programming Language, 2nd edition, 1989.
ii. S. P. Harbison, C: A Reference Manual, 5th edition, 2004.
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to give an in depth understanding of Object Oriented programming. It is to cater
for Object Oriented Programming practices like inheritance, interfaces, exception handling, action handling,
security, software reuse and robustness. The aim of the course is to: Move the students’ programming skills from
basic to advanced; Avail students with skills to handle non functional Programme aspects like robustness and
security and train students to develop complete computer applications.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference Books:
i. J. Lewis and W. Loftus, Java Software Solution: Foundations of Programme Design, 4th edition, 2008.
ii. K. A. Mughal and R. W. Rasmussen, A Programmer’s Guide to JavaTM Certification: A comprehensive
Primer, 3rd edition, 2008
CSC 1209 Logic Programming (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces a paradigm where computation arises from proof search in logic
according to a fixed, predictable strategy. It thereby unifies logical specification and implementation in a way that is
quite different from functional or imperative programming. This course provides a thorough, modern introduction to
logic programming. It introduces the basic concepts and techniques of logic programming followed by successive
refinement towards more efficient implementations or extensions to richer logical concepts. It covers a variety of
logics and operational interpretations. The aim of the course is to provide a basic introduction to the logic
Programming language and Prolog. It aims at introducing a number of logical systems of importance in computer
science.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
45

Reference Books:
i. M. R. Huth and M. D. Ryan, Logic in Computer Science, Modeling and Reasoning about Systems,
Cambridge University Press, 2000.
ii. SWI Prolog Home Page, http://www.swi-prolog.org/
CSC 2100: Data Structures and Algorithms (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students a firm foundation of data structures and algorithms. The course
trains students on systematic development and analysis of algorithms. The importance of algorithm complexity on
computer performance is emphasized. Typical computational problems and their solutions/analysis are to be
covered. The aims of the course are to; Make students appreciate the role of data structures and algorithms in
computer Programmes; Improve students’ problem solving skills by subjecting them to step by step analysis and
design of computer algorithms; Introduce students to concepts Data structures; Introduce students to concepts of
algorithm analysis and to expose students generic algorithmic problems and apply them to other computational
scenarios.
Indicative Content: Complexity analysis (Big-O notation, orders of growth, worst case, average case and amortized
analysis); NP-complete problems; Greedy algorithms; Dynamic programming; Design patterns for data structures;
Graphical representation of optimization problems; Parallel algorithms; Sorting and searching; Divide-and-conquer
algorithms; Elementary data structures; Recursive data structures (stacks, queues, linked lists, trees); Storing and
searching (hash tables, search trees); Graph algorithms on graphs (shortest path, spanning trees).
Reference Books:
i. A. V. Aho, J. D. Ullman, J. E. Hopcroft, Data Structures and Algorithms, Addison-Wesley, 1983.
ii. A. V. Aho,The Design and Analysis of Computer Algorithms, Addison-Wesley Longman, 1974.
iii. T. H. Cormen, C. E. Leiserson, R. L. Rivest, and C. Stein, Introduction to Algorithms 2nd edition,
McGraw Hill, 2008.
CSC 2111: Database Management Systems I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is to provide students with a strong foundation in systematic approaches to design
and implementing of database applications. Preliminarily, operations like requirements gathering and database
planning will be covered. The course will also introduce students to developing of application programs that talk to
the database. These applications may be online or offline. The aims of the course are to: Provide a background for
the evolution of database (management) systems; Provide the students with the steps one has to go through when
developing good database applications; Give hand on experience and knowledge in developing database (driven)
applications
Indicative Content: Background to databases; Evolution of database systems; Database organization and
architecture; Data base models; Over view of database application development; The database development life
cycle; Database design; Conceptual design; Logical design; Physical Design; Querying databases; SQL/PL SQL
and Scripting.
Reference Books:
i. T. Connolly and C. Begg: Database Solutions, 2nd edition, 2003.
CSC 2108: Software Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces students to the foundations of software engineering as a discipline.
Students are introduced to the evolving role of software engineering, especially with emphasis on software
engineering process and process models. Key topics covered include Software configuration management,
Requirement analysis, Software Specification, Design methods, Software testing, Software project management
techniques; Software project planning, Risk management; Software Quality Assurance; Software reuse; and
Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
46

Indicative Content;
• Evolving role of software, software characteristics; Systems and environment; system engineering
hierarchy, information and knowledge engineering; Information strategy; Business Area analysis, modeling
enterprise and business-level data modeling, system architecture and associated information flow; writing
system specification.
• Software Engineering as a layered technology: Software process, software process models. Software
configuration management: the SCM process, Identification of objects in software configuration, version
control, change control, configuration audit, SCM standards.
• Requirement analysis: Communication techniques, Information gathering tools; organizing and structuring
information; analysis principles; Analysis modeling.
• Software Specification: Design process, principles and concepts: Abstraction, refinement, modularity,
control hierarchy, structural partitioning, information hiding, functional independence, cohesion, coupling,
design heuristics;
• Design methods: data design, architectural design, transform mapping, design optimization, human
computer interface design, procedural design and tools; Design documentation.
• Software testing: Testing objectives, Testing principles, Testability, test case designing, white box testing;
Basis path testing: Condition testing, data flow testing, loop testing; Black box testing: graph based testing
methods, equivalence partitioning, Boundary value analysis, comparison testing; Testing documentation
and help facilities; Software testing strategy: unit testing, integration testing, validation testing, system
testing.
• Software project management techniques: project metrics, software measurement and metrics, software
quality metrics;
• Software project planning: objectives of planning, resources, project estimation and estimation models,
project decomposition techniques, make-buy decisions; automated estimation tools.
• Risk management: software risks, risk identification, risk projection, risk mitigation, monitoring and
management; Project Scheduling: people and effort relationships, defining tasks, defining task network,
scheduling techniques; Software teams and intra-team relationships; role of project manager.
• Software Quality Assurance: Concept of quality, quality control vs. quality assurance, cost of quality,
factors that affect quality, quantitative view of quality, quality metrics, defect removal efficiency SQA
activities, ISO standards and CMM practices, SEI levels, Software reviews, Formal approaches to SQA,
Statistical Quality Assurance. Software reliability, reliability metrics, reliability models, meeting reliability
requirements.
• Effective metrics for software process: Measurement principles, attributes of software metrics, metrics for
analysis model, metrics for design model, metrics for source code, metrics for maintenance.
• Software reuse: difficulties in reuse, hardware reuse vs. software reuse, reusable artifacts, domain
engineering approach, analysis design and construction of reusable components, classification and retrieval
of components, economic impact of reuse and reuse metrics.
• Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Peters, W. Pedrycz, Software Engineering: An Engineering Approach, John Wiley, 2000.
ii. R. S. Pressman, Software Engineering: A Practitioners Approach, 5th edition, McGraw Hill, 2005.
iii. I. Sommerville, Software Engineering, 8th edition, Addison Wesley, 2008.
iv. D. Ghezzi, M. Jazayeri, D. Mandrioli, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, Prentice Hall of India,
2004.
47

CSC 2200: Operating Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: Operating Systems course introduces students to software that controls hardware and makes
the hardware usable. Its interaction with other computer devises and how it controls other computer processes is
explored. The Course aims at providing students with a detailed understanding of how operating systems work;
skills to write basic Programmes to utilize underlying operating system infrastructures. At the end of the course,
students are able to know the dominant categories of operating systems are Windows and UNIX (Linux, Mac OS,
Solaris, etc). Students of operating systems are expected to have a proper understanding of the differences between
these two. Students should be able to understand different design principles for operating systems and various
software tools that make operating systems usable.
Indicative Content; Operating Systems Structures; Processes and threads; Thread creation, manipulation and
synchronization; Deadlock; Implementing Synchronization operations; CPU scheduling; Memory management;
File systems and file system implementation; Monitors; Segments; Disk Scheduling; Networking; UDP and TCP.
Reference Book:
i. W. Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles 5th edition, Prentice Hall, 2005.
CSC 2209: Systems Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: Systems programming is aimed at teaching students how to write Programmes using system
level services. The system of instruction is UNIX due to availability of free system tools that have been largely
developed by and for the academia. The course is aimed at giving students skills in tools provided by systems, their
commands, system calls and understanding for model of computation.
Indicative Content; Introduction and Unix Standardization; File input and output; Standard I/O Library; Files and
Directories; System Data Files and Information; Process Environment; Process Control; Process Relationships;
Signals; Threads; Advanced I/O and Inter process Communication
Reference Book:
i. W. R. Stevens, Advanced programming in the Unix Environment, Addison-Wesley, 2008.
CSC 2210 Automata, Complexity and Computability (3 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces students to the concept of automata and complexity. It sets a
background for more advanced studies like compiler construction and principles of programming languages. The
aims of the course are: To introduce students to the concepts of complexity, automata and computability; To prepare
students for advanced studies in compiler construction and principle of programming languages;
Indicative content: Finite state machines and regular languages: Deterministic and non deterministic machines;
Equivalence and minimization; Regular expressions and regular grammars; Kleene’s theorem. Push-down automata
and context free grammars; Normal forms of grammars; Top-down and bottom-up parsing; Turing machines and
computability; Church’s thesis; NP-Computable problems.
Reading Books:
i. J. E. Hopcroft, R. Motwani, J. D. Ullman, Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages, and
Computation; Addison Wesley, 2000.
ii. D. I. A. Cohen, Introduction to Computer Theory; John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1996.
CSC 2214 Cryptology and Coding Theory (3 CU)
Course Description: This course provides a foundation for further studies in information security. The course
introduces students to the exciting fields of cryptology and coding theory. Fundamentally, it deals with the
mathematics that underlies modern cryptology. Cryptology combines the studies of cryptography, the creating of
masked messages, and cryptanalysis, the unraveling of masked messages. Coding theory is the study of coding
schemes used to detect and correct errors that occur during the data transmission. The aims of this course are; To
understand the building blocks of crypto systems and error correction; To gain historical understanding of the
48

evolution of crypto systems; To develop tools necessary to crypto analyze crypto systems; To gain insights in the
practical application of cryptology and error correction in the modern information age; To understand the goals and
trade-offs associated with encryption and error-control coding systems.
Indicative Content; History of cryptology and coding theory; Shift registers Classical crypto-systems; Stream
ciphers; Block ciphers; Information theory; Crypto analysis techniques; Introduction to Elliptic curve cryptography;
Basic Algebra; Coding theory fundamentals; Linear codes; Hamming codes; Secret sharing schemes; Introduction
to Complexity; Hash functions; PGP & PKI Deffie-hellman key exchange protocol.
Reference Books:
i. A. Menezes, P. van Oorschot, and S. Vanstone, Handbook of Applied Cryptography, CRC Press, 1996.
ii. W. Trappe and C. Washington, Introduction to Cryptography with Coding Theory, 2nd edition, Prentice
Hall, 2006.
iii. S. Singh, The Code Book, Doubleday, 1999.
iv. S. S. Adams, Introduction to Algebraic Coding Theory with Gap, 2005.
CSC 3103: User Interface Design (4 CU)
Course Description The course introduces the principles of user interface development, focusing on design,
implementation and evaluation. The course aims at providing different skills to students, such as: Developing
efficient, flexible and interactive User Interfaces (UI); Provide ability to identifying system users, the tasks they
want to carry out and the environment in which they will be working; Creating a conceptual designs; Designing
various kinds of UI, in particular graphical user interfaces (GUIs) and websites; evaluating UIs; Appreciation of
realities of developing usable UIs in an organization.
Indicative Content: Usability; User-Centered Design; UI Software Architecture; Human Capabilities; Output
Models; Conceptual Models and Metaphors; Input Models; Design Principles; Paper Prototyping; Constraints and
Layouts; Graphic Design; Computer Prototyping; Heuristic Evaluation; User Testing; Experiment Design and
Experiment Analysis.
Reference Books:
i. D. A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things. New York, NY: Doubleday, 1990.
ii. J. Nielsen, Usability Engineering. Burlington, MA: Academic Press, 1994.
iii. K. Mullet and D. Sano, Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication oriented techniques. Prentice Hall,
1994.
CSC 3112: Principles of Programming Languages (3 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces students to the low level organization and operation of programming
languages. It covers semantic and syntactic as well as operational issues in programming languages. The building
blocks of programming languages are explored. The course gives students fundamental knowledge in the
organization and operation of programming languages. Students learn to appreciate the possible future evolutions of
programming languages. It exposes students to causes of operational (like performance, security, etc) characteristics
of programming languages. By the end of the course, students will be able to understand common language
paradigms; know the different building blocks of a programming language; know how the different blocks of a
programming language interact
Indicative Content:
• Overview over programming language paradigms; Common principles: syntax, syntax trees, formal
semantics (denotation and operational), variables and binding
• Types: role of types in programming and programming languages, types and their operations: products,
sums, functions, recursive types, reference and array types
• Primarily imperative issues: control flow, arrays, pointers and references, parameter-passing mechanisms,
49

scoping
• Type systems: strongly typed languages type checking (static vs. dynamic), type equivalence (by name vs.
structural), overloading, coercion, polymorphism, type inference
• Binding: declarations and environments. Block structure: scope and visibility, stack discipline. Bound
occurrences: static vs. dynamic binding.
• Encapsulation: information hiding, modules, abstract data types, classes
• Language implementation: parsing, code generation, garbage collection.
Reference Books:
i. D. P. Friedman, M. Wand, and C. T. Haynes, Essentials of Programming Languages, MIT Press, 2001
BIS 3100: Modeling and Simulation (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students theoretical and practical skills in modeling and simulation of
dynamic systems with a view of learning their behavior and the sensitivity of that behavior to certain parameters.
The course will familiarize students with modeling and simulation techniques that are applicable under varying
circumstances equip students with practical experiences of composing models and running simulations under
varying circumstances, equip students with skills of correctly representing simulation results
Indicative Content: Simulation of operational systems, Simulation as a decision making methodology, Model
development and validation, Design of simulation experiments, Generation of appropriate values of random
variables, Interactive procedures and interpretation of results.
Reference Books:
i. L. Oakshott, Business Modelling and Simulation, Trans- Atlantic Publications, 1997.
ii. R. G. Coyle, System Dynamics Modeling a Practical Approach, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 1996.
CSC 3105 Computer Graphics (3 CU)
Course Description: The course covers general purpose graphics systems and their use. It gives an in-depth
knowledge of computer graphics and graphical user interfaces.
The course introduces students to the concepts of graphical representation on computers, teaches students the design
of good graphical user interfaces.
Indicative Content: Students are exposed to Graphics hardware, Geometrical transformations, Surface and volume
visualization, Design and implementation of graphical user interfaces, Two dimensional imaging processes,
Computer graphics applications, Display system organization; Display devices and modes; Display file construction
and its structure; Graphic primitive - device initialization, view porting and windowing; Line drawing, simple and
symmetrical Digital Differential Analysis (DDA); Arch and circle generating DDA Line; and polygon clipping
algorithms; Curve plotting; Transformations- projections and perspective views; Picture segmentation: Graphics
standards - PHIGS and GKS.
Reference Books:
i. J. D. Foley, A. Van Dam, S. K. Feiner, J. F. Hughes and R. L. Phillips, Introduction to Computer
Graphics, Addison Wesley, 2003.
ii. P. Shirley, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, AK Peters, 2002.
CSC 3115 Advanced Programming (3 CU)
Course Description: This course highlights programming practices that are vital in the day today work of a
programming professional. While many systems are described by functionalities, some important aspects like
security, robustness, and maintainability are ignored. Students are to get an in-depth understanding of these concepts
as well as exploring the current trends in the programming environment. This course will concretize the student’s
past programming experience as well as highlighting critical practices in programming that are necessary for a
50

professional programmer. Therefore, after this course, the student should be able to implement non functional but
critical aspects of programming like robustness and security, develop well documented and well structured software
that can easily be maintained, be knowledgeable in other programming practices like mobile programming, be aware
of newer programming paradigms like service oriented and cloud computing.
Indicative Content: Programming for Security: Programming for Robustness; Programming for Maintainability;
Trends in Programming Paradigms
Reference Books:
i. W. R. Stevens and S. A. Rago, Advanced Programming in the UNIX Environment, Addison Wesley 1992.
CSC 3205 Compiler Design (3 CU)
Course Description: In this course unit, students shall understand the complete process of translating a Programme
in a high-level language to machine language. The course gives an introduction to the design and implementation of
a compiler with emphasis on principles and techniques for Programme analysis and translation. It also gives an
overview of the tools for compiler construction, Lexical analysis, token selection, transition diagrams, and finite
automata. The use of context-free grammars to describe syntax, derivations of parse trees, and construction of
parsers, Syntax directed translation schemes; Intermediate code; Symbol table; Code generation; Detection,
reporting, recovery and correction of errors.
Indicative Content: Language translators: Introduction to compilers and interpreters; The structure of a compiler:
lexical analysis, parsing, semantic analysis; Intermediate code generation, register allocation, global optimization;
Lexical scanning; Parsing; Automatic parser construction; FIRST and FOLLOW functions; LL (1) parsers; LR
parsers. Conflicts in LR grammars and how to resolve them; Semantic analysis: Attributes and their computation,
tree-traversals, visibility and name resolution; inherited attributes and symbol tables. Name resolution in blockstructured
languages; Type checking: Type systems, varieties of strong typing, overload resolution, polymorphism
and dynamic dispatching. Type checking and type inference, unification; Run-time or Run-time organization:
storage allocation, non-local references, parameter passing, dynamic storage allocation. Exception handling,
debugging information; Intermediate code generation: control structures, expressions, simple register allocation.
Aggregates and other high-level constructs; Global optimization
Reference Book:
i. W. M. Waite and G. Goos, Compiler construction, Springer Verlag 1994.
CSC 3206 Group Project (5 CU)
Course Content: The course is to allow students, in groups, to integrate the knowledge acquired over the previous
five semesters into solving a non trivial problem through a computer application. Emphasis will be put on the
systematic development methodology, the documentation of the development process, and how well the developed
system addresses the problem to be solved. Non functional attributes like robustness, usability, security and
reliability will also be tested. The course will give students experience in Group and collaborative work, Proper
procedures in development of computer systems, Proper documentation of the software development process,
Development of big not trivial computer projects. The content is to be determined by the students under the
guidance of the supervisor.
CSC 3207 Computer Security (3 CU)
Course Description: Computer security is a branch of technology concerned with digital security or information
security applied to computers. Since the largest part of the computer that users interact with is software, computer
security pays big attention to development of secure software. Students will be conversant with threats faced by
computers in the connected digital world, techniques that are used to protect computers against various threats.
Indicative Content: Digital security principles, Hardware based security mechanisms, Secure operating systems,
Security architecture, Security by design, Secure coding (Software Security), Access Control Lists and Security
Applications.
51

Reference Books:
i. R. J. Anderson: Security Engineering: A Guide to Building Dependable Distributed Systems, Willey 2001.
ii. R. C. Seacord: Secure Coding in C and C++, Addison Wesley, 2005.
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence and Data Warehousing (4 CU)
Course Description: This course covers techniques and software tools that can assist management that deals with
large amounts of data in management and business decision making. The course covers the fundamental differences
between databases and data warehouses, the techniques of developing data warehouses as well as manipulating them
to generate business strategic decisions. Students will be able to understand the role and operation of data
warehouses, be equipped with skills of developing, maintaining, and manipulating data warehouses to generate
information for business decision making.
Indicative Content: Data warehouse concepts: partitioning, granularity, record of source, and metadata; Building
viable decision support environments; Architect development, Data migration and integration, Use of operational
data stores, and transactional systems.
Reference Books:
i. P. Ponniah, Data warehousing fundamentals, Wiley, 2001.
BSE 3202: Distributed Systems Development (4 CU)
Course Content: This course gives students theoretical and practical skills on development of distributed systems
and applications. This includes distributed system-specific challenges like reliability and robustness. Students will
be equipped with skills of developing distributed systems.
Indicative Content; Event-driven software architectures, Distributed object computing, Development,
documentation and testing of distributed applications, Techniques for reusable, extensible and efficient software
systems, Maintainability and concurrence in distributed systems, Abstraction based on patterns and object-oriented
techniques
Reference Books:
i. S. Tanenbaum and M. V. Steen, Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2006.
ii. R. Anderson, Security Engineering: A Guide to Building Dependable Distributed Systems, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001.
6.4 Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology Programme (DSCIT)
6.4.1 Overview
The Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology, Makerere University runs a two year undergraduate
Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology. It was first introduced in 2003 and revised in 2009. The
revised curriculum took effect in 2009/2010 Academic year. It targets A-level leavers, Diploma holders and
Certificate holders. It is a day and evening privately sponsored Programme.
The main objectives of the Programme is develop personnel with theoretical and practical skills through hands on
training in Computer Science and Information Technology who will be able to provide high quality technical
support in computerized organizations. The Programme is run jointly by the Department of Computer Science and
Department of Information Technology. On top of overseeing the day to day running of the Programme, the
departments explore ways of improving the quality of the Programme so as to achieve its objectives.
52

1. Target Group
The revised Programme targets A- Level Leavers and Certificate holders.
2. Minimum admission requirements
To be admitted to the Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology, a candidate must satisfy the
general admission requirements for Makerere University. In addition, the following conditions apply:
(a) Direct Entry:
A Candidate must satisfy the general minimum entry requirements of Makerere University. In addition, the
following regulations shall hold: Candidates seeking admission through direct entry must have obtained:
i. The Uganda Certificate of Education (UCE) or its equivalent, with credits in English and Mathematics.
ii. At least two principle passes at the same sitting in Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE) in any
two subjects (Mathematics, Physics, Economics, Chemistry, Biology, Geography, Literature,
Entrepreneurship, Technical Drawing and Fine Art).
iii. For purposes of computing weighted points, the A- level subjects shall be grouped and weighted as follows:
(b) Diploma Holders
Group Weight Subjects
Essential 3 Any two best done subjects
Relevant 2 Any other best done subjects
Desirable 1 General Paper, Sub-Mathematics
Others 0.5 All others.
i. At least any second Class (lower division) diploma from a recognized institution.
ii. Candidates who hold a Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology from Makerere
University with at least second class (lower division) shall be admitted to second year of Bachelor of
Information Technology. Candidates who hold a pass class of the same diploma shall be admitted to
first year of Bachelor of Information Technology.
(c) Certificate Holders:
Candidates seeking admission through the certificate holders’ scheme must:
i. Have passed Mathematics and English with at least a credit in the Uganda Certificate of Education
ii. Have at least a credit certificate in computer science or related discipline from a recognized institution
3. Nature of the Programme
The Programme is both day and evening. It is an entirely privately sponsored Programme.
4. Duration
The duration of the Programme is two (2) academic years consisting of four (4) semesters and two recess terms.
Each semester lasts seventeen (17) weeks two of which are for examinations.
5. Tuition Fees
Tuition fees for privately sponsored students shall be 2,100,000 Uganda Shillings per year for Ugandans and
2,520,000 Uganda Shillings per year for non Ugandans. This is the same tuition fees for the existing curriculum.
6. Semester Load and Minimum Graduation Load
The normal semester load is between 15 and 24 credit units. The minimum graduation load is 60 credit units.
53

6.4.2 Programme Structure
A.) Computer Science Option
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 4 45 30 -- 60
DCS 1103 Gender and ICT 3 45 -- -- 45
DCS 1107 Fundamentals of Mathematics 3 30 -- 30 5
DCS 1108 Computer Assembly, Repair and Maintenance I 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 3 30 -- 30 45
DCS 1205 Programming Fundamentals 3 45 -- -- 45
DCS 1206 Computer Assembly, Repair and Maintenance II 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 1207 Fundamentals of Web site Design 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 1208 Fundamentals of Database Design 3 30 30 -- 45
Year 1. Recess Term
CSC 1301 Practical Skills Development 4 -- 120 -- 60
CSC 1303 Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited) 5 150 100 -- 200
Semester 3
CSC 1104 Computer Organization & Architecture 4 60 -- -- 60
CSC 1105 Numerical Methods 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 2103 Ethics in an IT Environment 3 45 -- -- 45
Electives: (1 elective course)
BIT 1102 Communication Technology & The Internet 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 1104 Information Technology I 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 4
CSC 1206 Computational Mathematics 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
CSC 1208 Individual Project I 4 15 90 -- 60
CSC 1209 Logic Programming 3 30 30 -- 45
Electives: (1 elective course)
BIT 1204 Information Management 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business 3 45 -- -- 45
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming 4 45 30 -- 60
54

B.) Information Technology Option
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 4 45 30 -- 60
DCS 1103 Gender and ICT 3 45 -- -- 45
DCS 1107 Fundamentals of Mathematics 3 30 -- 30 5
DCS 1108 Computer Assembly, Repair and Maintenance I 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 3 30 -- 30 45
DCS 1205 Programming Fundamentals 3 45 -- -- 45
DCS 1206 Computer Assembly, Repair and Maintenance II 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 1207 Fundamentals of Web site Design 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 1208 Fundamentals of Database Design 3 30 30 -- 45
Year 1: Recess Term
CSC 1301 Practical Skills Development 4 -- 120 -- 60
CSC 1302 CCNA Sem. I & II (Audited) 5 150 100 -- 200
Semester 3
BIT 1102 Communication Technology & The Internet 4 30 60 -- 60
BIT 1104 Information Technology I 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
DCS 2103 Ethics in an IT Environment 3 45 -- -- 45
Electives: (1 elective course)
CSC 1104 Computer Organization & Architecture 4 60 -- -- 60
CSC 1105 Numerical Methods 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 4
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
BIT 1204 Information Management 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business 3 45 -- -- 45
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming 4 45 30 -- 60
Electives: (1 elective course)
CSC 1206 Computational Mathematics 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 1208 Individual Project I 4 15 90 -- 60
CSC 1209 Logic Programming 3 30 30 -- 45
6.4.3 Course Unit Description
CSC 1100: Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; Equip students with skills of using common office
applications; Expose students to different operating systems; Equip students with skills of how to use the Internet;
and equip students with knowledge about common text editors in different operating systems. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; describe the historical evolution
55

of computers; competently use the common office applications in at least two operating systems and competently
use common text editor in at least two operating systems.
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
CSK 1101 Communication Skills (4 CU)
Course Description: This course provides students with skills of effective communication. These include verbal,
written, and gesture. The course aims at facilitating students appropriately and clearly communicate with others. The
aims of the course unit are to: Improve the communication competencies of the student; Improve problem solving
strategies of students; improve the art of critical thinking within the student; improve the student’s ability to collect
and synthesize information; provide students with knowledge to utilize the library and other educational resources.
Indicative Content:
• Writing Skills: Thinking critically/selectively before the writing process; selecting the relevant details;
organizing the relevant details logically; writing the reports essays, letters and taking notes in appropriate
register; avoiding ambiguities, fallacies, irrationalities; providing supportive evidence; editing documents,
proof reading; writing and expanding information; Quoting and citing references; writing a curriculum
vitae.
• Reading Skills: The use of skimming; scanning inference and prediction in reading; Intensive and critical
reading; Acquisition of specific reading skills; Interpretation of non linear texts; Locating information and
comprehension.
• Speaking and Listening Skills to Enhance Effective Public Relations: The art of persuasion in effective
speaking; Conducting interviews; Conducting meetings; Participating in group discussions and tutorials;
Non verbal communication clues; Presentation seminars, seeking clarification etc.; Expression of
politeness; Public speaking; Proper listening skills.
• Examination Skills; Preparing for examinations: How much one gets from group discussions; Proper
revision; Understanding examination rubric; Budgeting time during examination process; Writing
examinations and following instructions
Reference Books:
i. B. Bough, 101 ways to improve your communication skills instantly, 4th edition, 2005
ii. P. Klavs, The hard Truth About soft skills: Work Place Lessons Smart People wish they had learned
sooner, 2008.
DCS 1103: Gender and ICT (3 CU)
Course Description: This course tackles the concepts of gender and how it affects / is affected by the Information
and Communication Technologies. The course covers organizational, individual and technological aspects of the
relationship between gender and ICT. By the end of the course, students should be able to understand the social,
organizational and technological underpinnings of gender and how they affect/ are affected in the ICT environment.
Indicative Content: Introduction to Gender and ICT; Gender and Technology; Use of ICTs in addressing
addressing gender equality; Gender and ICTs: mapping the change; ICTs as tools to challenge gender inequality;
ICTs as tools to promote empowerment; Guidelines to gender sensitive policy making
Reference Books:
i. G. Lupton, P. M. Short and R. Whip, Society and Gender: An Introduction to Sociology, Macmillan, 1992.
ii. E. Rathgehen and E. O. Adena, Gender and the Information Revolution in Africa, 2000.
56

DCS 1107 Fundamentals of Mathematics (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces basic mathematics to the students. It lays foundation for further
mathematics and its applications in the course. it helps the student bridge high school mathematics to the
mathematics required at university level. The aim of the course is to give students a strong mathematical foundation
in order to comprehend further mathematical applications of computer science in the Programme. On completion of
this course unit, the students will be able to: Perform basic and intermediate differentiation; Perform basic and
intermediate integration; Demonstrate adequate knowledge of trigonometry; be able to solve simple systems of
linear equations and demonstrate knowledge of geometry.
Indicative Content:
• Differentiation: Gradient of a curve, chain rule, products and quotients, implicit differentiation, products
and quotients, rates of change.
• Integration: Basic integration, change of variables, integration by inspection, integration by parts.
• Trigonometry: Trigonometric curves, compound and half angle formulae, derivatives of trigonometric
functions:
• Systems of linear equations: Solution by elimination, substitution and crammer’s rule
• Geometry: Equation of lines, planes, intersection of lines and lines, lines and planes and planes and planes
Reference Books:
i. J. K. Backhouse and S. P. T. Houldsworth, Pure Mathematics I, Longmans, Press, 2005.
DCS 1108: Computer Maintenance, Repair and Assembly I (3 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students foundation knowledge on maintenance, assembly and repair of
desktop computers and laptops. Students learn the art of maintaining of computers as well as assembling and
repairing them. The course is largely hand on. The aims of the course are: To give students skills of assembling
computers; replaying specific parts of the computers and repairing computers. By the end of the course, the student
should be able to connect a computer to printers, networks, scanners, etc; Assemble a computer from its parts and be
able to identify different components of the computer (internal and External); be able to identify and replace
defective parts of a computer
Indicative Content: Computer Assembly
Reference Book:
i. J. Z. Rosenthal and K. J. Irwin, PC Repair and Maintainance: A Practical Guide, Charles River Media,
2003.
CSC 1204 Research Methodology (3 CU)
Course Description: The purpose of this course is to acquaint students with types of scientific research relevant for
anyone working in the field of computer science. It will enable students to develop capacity to conduct small, simple
research projects while at the university. The aims of the course are to provide the student with: Enable students
become competent in understanding the research process. Provide skills that will enable students undertake
independent research using a variety of appropriate methods, using primary and secondary data, as well as
qualitative and quantitative techniques. Provide students with skills to produce a research proposal and highlight
ethical research practices to students.
Indicative Content: Introduction to scientific research; Formulating and clarifying the research topic and research
problem; Conducting a literature review; Different research approaches; Ethics in research; Sampling; Use of
secondary data; Collection methods for primary data; Analyzing qualitative data; Analyzing quantitative data and
writing a research proposal and project report.
57

Reference Books:
i. H. Cooper, Synthesizing Research: A Guide for Literature Reviews, Thousand Oaks, California: Sage
Publications, 1998.
ii. M. Sounders, P. Lewis & A. Thornhill, Research Methods for Students, 3rd edition, UK, Financial times,
Prentice hall 2003.
DCS 1205: Programming Fundamentals (3 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students the fundamentals of programming. Students learn Programme flow,
control as well as selected procedures using pseudo codes. Flow chats are used to conceptualize the flow and syntax
of the operations. The aim of the course is to give students a conceptual view of the art of programming and
Programme controls so that they are able to competently implement programming projects in specific languages.
Indicative Content: Programme structure; Variables and declarations; Programme controls; Searching and sorting;
Functions and procedures; Searching and sorting
Reference Books:
i. R. E. Neapolitan, K. Naimipour, Foundations of Algorithms Using C++ Pseudocode, 2nd edition , Jones
& Bartlett Publishers, 1998.
DCS 1206: Computer Maintenance, Repair and Assembly II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course give students advanced knowledge in repair and maintenance of computers.
Students go beyond assembling into identification of faulty parts and replacements as well as software installation,
upgrades and troubleshooting. The aims of the course are to give students advanced skills in computer repair and
trouble shooting. By the end of the course, the student should be able to repair, trouble shoot, install and upgrade
computer Programmes.
DCS 1207: Fundamentals of Website Design (3 CU)
Course Description: This course aims to provide an understanding of the basics of the Internet, how it originated,
how it works, and how to develop and maintain Web sites using HTML editors and site management tools such as
FrontPage and/or Dream weaver. The primary aim of this course is to provide a basic understanding of Internet
related technologies and introductory skills in Web applications.
Indicative Content: Introduction to basic Internet Technologies such as DNS, email services, LDAP and the HTTP
protocol; Web lay out and presentation; Web site development; Dynamic web sites and content management;
Trends in web technologies
Reference Books;
i. J. N. Robbins and A. Gustafson, Learning Web Design: A Beginner’s Guide to (X) HTML, Style Sheets,
and Web Graphics, O’Reilly Media, 2007.
DCS 1208: Fundamentals of Database Design (3 CU)
Course Description: This course gives students skills in the design and development of databases together with
database applications. The course caters for design as well as scripting skills. The aims of the course are: To teach
students systematic ways of designing database schemas; to teach students skills of developing database
applications. By the end of the course, students should be able to: Systematically design database schemas given a
data requirements document; Develop good applications Programmes that manipulate data in a database.
Indicative Content: Database requirements collection; database Design; Introduction to SQL, Advanced SQL,
Query-By-Example (QBE); Introduction to Visual Basic; Scripting
Reference Book:
i. T. Connolly and C. Begg, Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management, 2005.
58

CSC 1301: Practical Skills Development (4 CU)
Course Description: The course aims at imparting practical skills in areas chosen by the faculty. The students are to
be supervised by staff with in the faculty. Areas of practical skills development include; Implementation of projects;
Network and system administration; Hardware maintenance and Computer assembly.
This can be done within the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology or any other unit in Makerere
University. Students will write a report at the end of the course.
CSC 1303: Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited) (5 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students will cover the course content of the CCNA international curriculum.
CSC 1104: Computer Organization & Architecture (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces the logical architecture and organization of computer systems. It
highlights the lower end operations in a typical computer as well as the way computers manage their resources
during operation. The course opens up a student to be an informed user of the computer rather than a passive
recipient of the computer services. Teaching will be in terms of lectures as well as tutorials. The aims of the course
are: To introduce to students the concepts of computer organization; to highlight to students the way computers
process and store the data; to highlight internal management issues in computer systems. By the end of the course,
the student will be able to know the organization, processing and storage mechanisms of computer systems.
Indicative Content
• Data Representation: Integer Formats, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Systems, Negative integers and 2’s
Complement, Floating Point Formats, BCD Formats, Alphanumeric Codes.
• Basic Digital Circuits: Logic gates, Karnaugh maps, Combinatorial Circuits, Binary Adders, Multiplexers
and Demultiplexers, Comparators, Decoders and Encoders, Code Converters, ROMS and PLA’s,
Sequential Circuits, Flip Flops and Latches, R-S flip flops, J-K flip flops, T flip Flops, D flip flops,
Registers, Shift Registers and Data Transmission, Sequential Network Design.
• Micro Computer Architecture: CPU, Memory, I/O Devices and Interfaces, System Bus, Examples of CPU
Structures, The Intel Pentium CPU, The Z-80 or Motorolla, Machine Language Instructions, Instruction
Formats and Addressing Modes.
• The Processing Elements: Macroinstruction execution, Internal Bus Transfers, Detailed Internal
Architecture, Microcontrol, Hardwired Control, Micro programmed Control, Reduced Instruction Set
Computers.
• I/O Programming: Programmed I/O, Interrupt I/O, Polling, Priority Interrupt System, Direct Memory
Access, I/O processors.
• Memory Systems and Memory Management: Memory Hierarchy, Main Memory, Auxiliary Memory,
Associative Memory,
• Cache Memory, Virtual Memory, Memory Management Hardware
Reference Books:
i. M. M. Mano, Computer Systems Architecture, Prentice Hall, 1993.
ii. A. S. Tanebaum, Structured Computer Organization, Prentice Hall 1984.
iii. G. B. Gibson, Computer Systems Concepts and Design, Prentice Hall, 1991.
iv. W. Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, Prentice Hall 2003.
CSC 1105: Numerical Methods (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to sharpen the students’ skills in using numerical approaches to solve
mathematical/real life problems. The focus will be on the ability to correctly formulate numerical problems and
schemes that solve them. Emphasis will be put on the precision and robustness of the schemes. The course will be
59

taught theoretically. The developed schemes can be implemented and run in any programming language. The aims
of the course are; to provide a solid basis on the numerical approaches to computational problem solving; To
provide students with problem analysis and solving skills to be able to handle typical computational problems in
practice. By the end of the course, the student should be able to; Derive schemes for different set ups of numerical
problems; Test for convergence of different schemes; correctly use the schemes to generate solutions to the
numerical problems to the required precision.
Indicative Content: Numerical solutions to non linear equations; Numerical solutions for systems of linear
equations; Fast - Fourier transforms; Numerical differentiation; Numerical integration; Numerical solutions for
differential and difference equations.
Reference Books:
i. R. L. Burden and J. D. Faires, Numerical Analysis, Wardsworth, 1993.
ii. A. K. Kaw, E. E. Kalu and D. Nguyen, Numerical Methods with Applications, 2008.
CSC 1106: Programming Methodology I (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to create a strong base in the principles and practice of functional programming.
A high level programming language like C is to be used. Students are to cover both theoretical principles and hands
on practical skills. The main concepts to cover include Programme structure, data structures, syntactical and
semantic correctness, planning and segmentation in programming as well as working with files. The aims of the
course are to provide the student with: comprehensive knowledge about structured oriented programming;
Knowledge in planning and organization of programming projects; Knowledge and techniques of evaluating
syntactic and semantic correctness of a computer Programme and strong practical basis in programming.
Indicative Content: Program structure; Variables and Operators; Conditional statements; Looping statements;
Arrays and strings; Functions; Advanced data types; Pointers; Dynamic memory allocation and dynamic structures;
Working with files and GUI.
Reference Books:
i. B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, C Programmeming Language, 2nd edition, 1989.
ii. S. P. Harbison, C: A Reference Manual, 5th edition, 2004.
DCS 2103: Ethics in an IT Environment (3 CU)
Course Description: The course addresses ethical issues in an IT environment. It explores cases of un ethical
conduct possible by IT professionals and how they can impact on the overall success/failure. The course aims at
instilling ethical conduct in students so that they can be more resourceful in the organizations where they work.
Indicative Content: Introduction to Ethics; Legal aspects and Implication of un ethical behavior; Business
implications of un ethical behavior; Typical Un ethical behaviors in an ICT environment; Mitigation and defensive
measures of un ethical behavior in ICT environment
Reference Book:
i. J. M. Kizza, Ethical and Social Issues in the Information Age, 2nd edition, Springer, 2003.
BIT 1102 Communications Technology & Internet (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is intended to be at the introductory level in a curriculum and to provide
foundation skills for subsequent network-related courses, for example, Internet Programming. It provides an
overview of Communications Technology and Internet. The goal is to help students understand the role and meaning
of Communications Technology and Internet in the contemporary world. The course aims to: Give students main
guidelines for the future study of networks-related courses; Develop their knowledge and understanding of core
networking concepts and technologies; Internet and intranet tools; basics of networking protocols; basics of network
security; core Internet infrastructure; personal, business, social, legal and ethical implications of Internet
governance.
60

Indicative Content: Networking Concepts; Internet and Intra net Tools; Protocols; Security; Internet Infrastructure
and Governance Personal, Business, Social, Legal and Ethical Implications
Reference Books:
i. D. E. Comer,The Internet Book, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
ii. D. Amor, Internet Future Strategies: How Pervasive Computing Services Will Change the World, Prentice
Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2002.
iii. I. Zeid, Mastering the Internet and HTML, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
iv. P. Gralla, How the Internet Works, QUE Publishing, Indianapolis, 2006.
v. A. E. Grant, J. H. Meadows, Communication Technology Update and Fundamentals, Focal Press, 2008.
vi. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, The New Communications Technologies, 5th Edition: Applications, Policy,
and Impact, Focal Press, 2004.
vii. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, Communication Technology and Social Change: Theory and Implications
Lea’s Communication Series, Lawrence Erlbaum, 2006.
BIT 1104: Information Technology I (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is intended to be at the introductory level in a curriculum and to provide
foundation skills for subsequent courses. Together with Information Technology II it provides an overview of the
discipline of IT, and begins to instill an IT mindset. The goal is to help students understand the diverse contexts in
which IT is used and the challenges inherent in the diffusion of innovative technology. The topics covered in this
course include: User Centeredness and Advocacy; Information Assurance and Security; IT Systems Model;
Management of Complexity (Abstraction, Modeling, best Practices, Patterns, Standards, Use of Appropriate Tools);
Adaptability; Professionalism (Life-long Learning, Professional Development, Ethics, Responsibility, Interpersonal
Skills, Data versus Information). The course aims to: Give the students main guidelines for the future study of ITrelated
courses; Develop their knowledge and understanding of the components of IT systems and their
interrelationships;
Indicative Content:
• User Centeredness and Advocacy;
• Information Assurance and Security;
• IT Systems Model;
• Management of Complexity; Abstraction; Modeling; Best Practices; Patterns; Standards; Use of
Appropriate Tools
• Adaptability
• Professionalism; Life-long Learning; Professional Development; Ethics; Responsibility; Interpersonal
Skills; Data versus Information
Reference Books:
i. J. A. Senn, Information Technology: Principles, Practices, Opportunities, Pearson Education, 2003.
ii. D. Cyganski, J. A. Orr, Information Technology: Inside and Outside, Prentice Hall, 2001.
iii. E. Turban, K. R. Rainer, R. E. Porter, Introduction to Information Technology, Whiley and Sons Inc., 2007.
iv. J. Baschab, J. Piot , N.G. Garr, The Executive’s Guide to Information Technology, Whiley and Sons Inc.,
2007.
v. E. G. Walters, The Essential Guide to Computing: The Story of Information Technology, Prentice Hall Inc.,
2000.
vi. L. Snyder, Fluency with Information Technology: Skills, Concepts, and Capabilities, 3rd edition, Addison-
Wesley, 2007.
61

vii. B. Williams, and S. Sawyer, Using Information Technology, Career, Education, 2009.
CSC 1206: Computational Mathematics (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives the students a strong mathematical base to be able to tackle other computer
problems. The course brings together mathematical topics which are commonly used in the general area of computer
science. It builds a foundation for other courses that need special mathematical backgrounds. The teaching will
largely involve lectures, together with tutorials and take home assignments The aims of the course are: To provide
students with a mathematical base that is to be used to solve computer science problems; To improve the problem
solving skills of students.
Indicative Content:
• Calculus; Sequences and limits; Limits of functions & continuity Advanced differential calculus
• Statistics; Discrete Random variables and distributions; Continuous distributions; Basics of Monte Carlo
simulations
• Further topics; Mathematics for image processing; Mathematics for signal processing
Reference Book:
i. B. G. Thomas, R. L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 9th edition, Addison Wesley, 1995.
ii. R. E. Walpole, Introduction to Statistics, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall, 1982.
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to give an in depth understanding of Object Oriented programming. It is to cater
for Object Oriented Programming practices like inheritance, interfaces, exception handling, action handling,
security, software reuse and robustness. The aim of the course is to: Move the students’ programming skills from
basic to advanced; Avail students with skills to handle non functional Programme aspects like robustness and
security and train students to develop complete computer applications.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference Books:
i. J. Lewis and W. Loftus, Java Software Solution: Foundations of Programme Design, 4th edition, 2008.
ii. K. A. Mughal and R. W. Rasmussen, A Programmer’s Guide to JavaTM Certification: A comprehensive
Primer, 3rd edition, 2008.
CSC 1208: Individual Project I (4 CU)
Course Content: This course is to give students an experience of developing simple but complete applications.
Focus will be put on programming and Programme documentations as well as realization of the objectives.
The aims of the course are: To practically give students skills of integrating different concepts of programming into
a single application; To introduce the student to hands on aspects of software development; To nurture the student’s
ability to independently read different sources of literature so as to identify what (s)he can use to develop his/her
application.
CSC 1209 Logic Programming (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces a paradigm where computation arises from proof search in logic
according to a fixed, predictable strategy. It thereby unifies logical specification and implementation in a way that is
quite different from functional or imperative programming. This course provides a thorough, modern introduction to
logic programming. It introduces the basic concepts and techniques of logic programming followed by successive
refinement towards more efficient implementations or extensions to richer logical concepts. It covers a variety of
62

logics and operational interpretations. The aim of the course is to provide a basic introduction to the logic
Programming language and Prolog. It aims at introducing a number of logical systems of importance in computer
science.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference books:
i. M. R. Huth and M. D. Ryan, Logic in Computer Science, Modeling and Reasoning about Systems,
Cambridge University Press, 2000.
ii. SWI Prolog Home Page, http://www.swi-prolog.org
BIT 1204 Information Management (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is important to the management, productivity and differentiation of an
organization. Information is derived from data. This means that data must be efficiently collected, organized,
retrieved and managed to make it meaningful to the organization. Thus, the development, deployment, management
and integration of data and information systems to support the organization are a vital role of the IT professional.
Consequently, the knowledge area of Information Management should include the collection, organization,
modeling, transformation, presentation, safety and security of the data and information. This course is aimed at
giving students the skills needed to efficiently collect, organize, model, transform, present, and secure data and
information. Students will learn how to integrate information with Information Systems to make it meaningful to the
Organization.
Indicative Content: Concepts and fundamentals of Information management; Information system: purpose, use and
value; Properties of data (quality, accuracy, timeliness); Database systems; Analysis of data, forms & sources; Data
collection and retention; Information backup and recovery; Database Query Languages; SQL data manipulation,
data definition and performance tuning/optimization; XQuery and Xpath; Reports; Query by example and by
optimization; Data Organization Architecture; Data models, Hierarchical, network and relational models; Object and
Object-relational databases; Logical, XML/XMI databases; Semantic and dimensional model; Star schema;
Normalization and Data Integrity; Data modeling; Conceptual, logical and physical models; Re engineering of
Databases; Standardized modeling in IDEF1, UML; CASE tools and data integration; Data Integration (data
warehouses and data marts); Managing the Database Environment; Data and Database administration.; Distributed
databases and patterns of distribution; Client server databases; N-tier architectures; Special-purpose databases (text,
multimedia Temporal, spatial, mobile, scientific/genomic); Decision support; Knowledge management and
Information retrieval (digital libraries)
Reference Books:
i. T. Connolly, C. Begg, Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management. USA: Pearson Education Limited, 2002.
ii. E. Turban., E. McLean, and J. Wetherbe, Information Technology for management: making connections
for strategic advantage. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1998.
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business (3 CU)
Course Description: The course covers the integration of Information and Communication Technologies into
organizations and their working practices, from design and implementation to strategic effects. Drawing on
Information Systems (IS) and Management literature, the course offers a chance for students to examine case
Studies of IS successes and failures and to explore real-world IS management issues. The course aims to provide
students with knowledge for understanding the integration of business and technology resources to facilitate
effective and efficient realization of an organizations mission and objectives.
63

Upon successful completion of this course, the student should be able to: Appreciate the role of information
technology and information systems function in modern organizations. Understand the factors influencing
information systems engineering. Gain an understanding of how to manage and grow information systems in
organizations.
Indicative Content:
An information systems model: An Information System uses the resources of people, hardware, software, data, and
networks to perform input, processing, output, storage and control activities that covert data resources into
information products; Role of Information Systems in an organization; The shift from data processing Systems via
information Systems to knowledge- Based Systems; How information and knowledge add value to an organization;
Information Systems Trends; The Information Technology component of Information Systems; Information Systems
Engineering; Strategic planning: Organizational strategies and objectives; Human resource development: budgeting,
costing, charging, hire versus buy decisions; Hardware and software procurement: request for proposal, evaluation,
selection, contracting and maintenance; Security in computing: continuity
of processes, controls and planning for standby; Computer audit; Project management: approaches, tools, site
planning and installation.
Reference Books:
i. G. Curtis, Business Information Systems: Analysis, Design and Practice, 1995.
ii. P. Bocij, D. Chaffey, A. Greasley, S. Hickie, Business Information Systems: Technology, Development
and Management for the E-Business, Prentice Hall, 2005.
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: This course covers ASP.NET development fundamentals, providing hands-on experience
through the building of a fully functional time and expense tracking application like TimeEx. Starting with an
overview of server-side technologies, it then goes into the C# (C Sharp) programming language commonly used for
ASP.NET and database development utilizing MSDE (Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine). Particular attention
is given to techniques for integrating ASP.NET pages with the advanced client-side (DHTML) technologies covered
first. The aims of this course are to: - To introduce students to the .Net development environment; To enable
students apply core ASP.NET technologies to web application development; To teach students to write server-side
ASP.NET code; To teach students to create web applications that use ADO.NET to interact with SQL Server; To
enable the students master the integration of ASP.NET pages into DHTML driven pages.
Indicative Content: ASP.NET development fundamentals; Server-side technologies; Interaction of web application
with SQL Database; Integration of ASP.NET pages into advanced client-side technologies
Reference Books:
i. Z. Ruvalcaba, Build Your Own ASP.NET Web site Using C# & VB.NET, 1st edition, 2005.
ii. P. J. Deite and H. M. Deitel, Internet &World WideWeb: How to Programme, Prentice Hall; 4th edition,
2007.
iii. S. Walther, ASP.NET Unleashed: unleashed, Sams Publishing, 2003.
iv. K. Kalata, Internet Programming with VBScript and JavaScript (Web warrior series), Course Technology,
1st edition, 2000.
64

7.0 DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
7.1 Introduction
The Department of Information Technology strives for the best through its mission:
1. Teach academic Programmes that relate to the dynamic and changing needs of graduates in an information
society
2. Advancement of IT knowledge and application through state of the art research
3. Support IT-based advancements in both the industry and society
Established in 2005 as one of the four departments within the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology,
the department of Information Technology is helping Makerere University to gain national height in the area of
Information Technology. This department has been in existence for four (4) years now. In the four years so far, we
have tried to work towards exceeding all our expectations and accomplishments. Particularly, the students’
achievements, the rising reputation of our department and the faculty at large as well as the thrilling partnerships we
have made with the international academia, government and industry friends makes our pride.
In the years that follow, and in relation to the Makerere University strategic plan (2008/09 – 2018/19), our
department seeks to shift to the next level by focusing on our ability to make IT a fundamental part of the learning
enterprise on the Makerere University campus. More so, we are collaborating with various academic and business
world partners to effectively incorporate IT into diverse disciplines. To this end, we need your involvement in order
to achieve our aims. As a department, our goal is to continuously build on our past four years’ achievements, at the
same time continuously expand our high-quality Programme that not only includes outstanding department staff, a
highly-developed curriculum, exceptional facilities, growing and recognized research, but also challenging students
at different levels.
The department offers three degree Programmes and two diploma (ordinary and graduate) Programmes,
respectively. These are: Bachelor of Information Technology (BIT), Masters in Information Technology (MIT) and
a PhD in Information Technology (PhD. IT), Diploma in Information Technology (DIT) and a Post Graduate
Diploma in Information Technology (PGDIT). The department undertakes research in e-learning, multimedia
technologies, and ICT for development in striving to expand our national reputation. The IT department represents
the joint efforts of the Makerere University, the private industry and Uganda as a nation to address the growing
worldwide needs for knowledgeable professionals in the area of Information Technology.
7.2 Bachelor of Information Technology (BIT) Degree Programme
7.2.1 Overview
The Bachelor of Information Technology (BIT) is a three year full-time degree programme open to all prospective
students. This programme was first launched in August 2004. The programme offers flexibility while providing the
level of knowledge and skills required by industry and professional bodies. The current curriculum was designed
with emphasis on having the student acquire the business, media, computing and communication skills necessary for
employment and career opportunities in today’s ICT industries and business organizations. Students on the BIT
Degree Programme develop conceptual and practical IT skills in integrating financial, organisational, marketing and
65
Dr. Josephine Nabukenya
Head of Department

production/service function with an overall business strategy. The majority will take up Managerial positions in
Information and Communication Technology (computing and ICT-based) sectors, and other positions such as Web-
Designers, Web- Programmers, Information Technology Planners, Systems Analysts, IT Project Managers, IT
Company Secretaries, Information Systems Specialists and IT Lecturers. Others will take up further studies in
Information Technology like a Master of Information Technology (MIT).
The Objectives of the Programme are to:
a) Develop professionals with theoretical and practical skills in the Information Technology (IT) sector.
b) Address the increasing demand for ICT training and professionals.
c) Strengthen capacity and institutional building in IT discipline in tertiary institutions, private and public
sectors.
The Bachelor of Information Technology Degree Programme is offered to give an opportunity to prospective
students to undertake training in Information Technology (IT). This programme also provides an avenue to those
already engaged in the IT-sector without formal degree qualifications in IT to join the BIT Degree Programme
through either direct or diploma schemes. Since Information Technology is a new discipline, this programme
provides a pool of IT Professionals that are much needed in today’s IT industry.
1. Target Group
The revised programme targets two categories of people, namely Direct Entry and Diploma Holders in relevant
programmes.
2. Minimum Admission Requirements
a) Direct Entry
A candidate must satisfy the general admission requirements for Makerere University. In addition, the following
regulations shall hold:
i. The Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE) or its equivalent with credits in English and
Mathematics.
ii. At least two principal passes at the same sitting in Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE)
in any two subjects (Mathematics, Physics, Economics, Chemistry, Biology, Geography, Literature,
Entrepreneurship, Technical Drawing and Fine Art).
iii. For purposes of computing weighted points, the A- level subjects shall be grouped and weighted as follows:
b) Diploma Holders
Group Weight Subjects
Essential 3 Any two best done subjects among: Mathematics, Physics,
Economics, Chemistry, Biology, Geography, Literature,
Entrepreneurship, Technical Drawing and Fine Art
Relevant 2 Any other best done subject of all A’ level subjects
Desirable 1 General Paper, Sub-Mathematics
Others 0.5 All others.
For a candidate to be admitted via the diploma scheme, he/she must:
i. At least any second Class (lower division) diploma from a recognized institution.
ii. Candidates who hold a Diploma in Computer Science and Information Technology from Makerere University
with at least second class (lower division) shall be admitted to second year of Bachelor of Information
Technology. Candidates who hold a pass class of the same diploma shall be admitted to first year of
Bachelor of Information Technology.
3. Nature of the Programme
66

The day programme is both government and privately sponsored students. The evening Programme has privately
sponsored students only.
4. Duration
The duration for the programme shall be three (3) academic years comprising of six (6) semesters and two recess
terms. Each semester lasts seventeen (17) weeks to of which are for examinations.
5. Tuition Fees
Tuition fees for privately sponsored students shall be 2,520,000 Uganda Shillings per year for Ugandans and
3,780,000 Uganda Shillings per year for non Ugandans. This is the same tuition fees for the existing curriculum.
6. Semester Load and Minimum Graduation Load
The normal semester load is between 15 and 21 credit units. The minimum graduation load is 127 credit units
of which 111 credit units are from core course units. The remaining 16 credit units are to be got from elective
course units in semesters where elective courses are offered.
7.2.2 Programme Structure
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CU LH PH TH CH
Semester 1
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 30 60 -- 60
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I 3 30 30 -- 45
BIT 1102 Communications Technology & the Internet 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 1104 Information Technology I
Semester 2
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II 4 30 60 -- 45
BIT 1204 Information Management 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business 3 45 -- -- 45
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming 4 45 30 -- 60
Year I Recess Term
CSC 1301 Practical Skills Development 4 -- 120 -- 60
CSC 1303 Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited) 5 150 100 -- 200
Semester 3
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I 3 30 30 -- 45
BIT 2107 Web Systems and Technologies I 3 30 30 -- 45
BIT 2108 Information Technology II 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 2109 Integrative Programming and Technologies 4 45 30 30 60
Electives:- (1 elective course)
BIT 2103 Electronic Commerce 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 2105 Electronic Media Systems and Multimedia 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 4
BSE 2203 Computer Networks & Data Communication 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 2200 Operating Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 2205 System Administration 3 30 -- 30 45
CSC 2202 Systems Analysis & Design 4 45 -- 30 60
Electives:- (1 elective course)
67

BIT 2206 Professional Law and Ethics 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 2201 Marketing in the IT Sector 3 45 -- -- 45
Year 2 Recess Term
BIT 2301 Industrial Training 4 -- 120 -- 60
Semester 5
BIT 3104 Business Communication and Report Writing 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 3105 Web Systems & Technologies II 3 30 30 -- 45
BIT 3102 Entrepreneurship and Business 3 30 30 -- 45
BIS 3102 Human Computer Interaction 3 30 -- 3- 45
Electives: (1 elective course)
BIT 3106 Software Engineering for Internet Applications 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 3103 User Interface Design 4 45 30 -- 60
Semester 6
BIT 3206 Information Assurance & Security 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 3207 System Integration & Architecture 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 3208 BIT Group Project 4 -- 120 -- 60
Electives: (1 elective course)
BIT 3203 Mobile Networks and Computing 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence & Data Warehousing 4 5 -- 30 60
7.2.3 Course Unit Description
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; Equip students with skills of using common office
applications; Expose students to different operating systems; Equip students with skills of how to use the Internet;
and equip students with knowledge about common text editors in different operating systems. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; describe the historical evolution
of computers; competently use the common office applications in at least two operating systems and competently
use common text editor in at least two operating systems.
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
CSK 1101 Communication Skills (4 CU)
Course Description: This course provides students with skills of effective communication. These include verbal,
written, and gesture. The course aims at facilitating students appropriately and clearly communicate with others. The
aims of the course unit are to: Improve the communication competencies of the student; Improve problem solving
strategies of students; improve the art of critical thinking within the student; improve the student’s ability to collect
and synthesize information; provide students with knowledge to utilize the library and other educational resources.
Indicative Content:
• Writing Skills: Thinking critically/selectively before the writing process; selecting the relevant details;
organizing the relevant details logically; writing the reports essays, letters and taking notes in appropriate
68

egister; avoiding ambiguities, fallacies, irrationalities; providing supportive evidence; editing documents,
proof reading; writing and expanding information; Quoting and citing references; writing a curriculum
vitae.
• Reading Skills: The use of skimming; scanning inference and prediction in reading; Intensive and critical
reading; Acquisition of specific reading skills; Interpretation of non linear texts; Locating information and
comprehension.
• Speaking and Listening Skills to Enhance Effective Public Relations: The art of persuasion in effective
speaking; Conducting interviews; Conducting meetings; Participating in group discussions and tutorials;
Non verbal communication clues; Presentation seminars, seeking clarification etc.; Expression of
politeness; Public speaking; Proper listening skills.
• Examination Skills; Preparing for examinations: How much one gets from group discussions; Proper
revision; Understanding examination rubric; Budgeting time during examination process; Writing
examinations and following instructions
Reference Books
i. B. Bough, 101 ways to improve your communication skills instantly, 4th Edition, 2005.
ii. P. Klavs, The hard Truth About soft skills: Work Place Lessons Smart People wish they had learned sooner,
2008.
BIT 1102 Communications Technology & Internet (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is intended to be at the introductory level in a curriculum and to provide
foundation skills for subsequent network-related courses, for example, Internet Programming. It provides an
overview of Communications Technology and Internet. The goal is to help students understand the role and meaning
of Communications Technology and Internet in the contemporary world. The course aims to: Give students main
guidelines for the future study of networks-related courses; Develop their knowledge and understanding of core
networking concepts and technologies; Internet and intranet tools; basics of networking protocols; basics of network
security; core Internet infrastructure; personal, business, social, legal and ethical implications of Internet governance
Indicative Content: Networking Concepts; Internet and Intranet Tools; Protocols; Security; Internet; Infrastructure
and Governance – Personal, Business, Social, Legal and Ethical; Implications
Reference Books:
i. D. E. Comer,The Internet Book, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
ii. D. Amor, Internet Future Strategies: How Pervasive Computing Services Will Change the World, Prentice
Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2002.
iii. I. Zeid, Mastering the Internet and HTML, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
iv. Internet Getting Started, Editions ENI, Nantes, 2001.
v. A. E. Grant, J. H. Meadows, Communication Technology Update and Fundamentals, Focal Press, 2008.
vi. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, The New Communications Technologies: Applications, Policy, and Impact,
5th edition, Focal Press, 2004.
vii. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, L. Erlbaum, Communication Technology and Social Change: Theory and
Implications, Lea's Communication Series, 2006.
BIT 1104 Information Technology I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is intended to be at the introductory level in a curriculum and to provide
foundation skills for subsequent courses. Together with Information Technology II it provides an overview of the
discipline of IT, and begins to instil an IT mindset. The goal is to help students understand the diverse contexts in
which IT is used and the challenges inherent in the diffusion of innovative technology.
69

Indicative Content: User Centeredness and Advocacy; Information Assurance and Security; IT Systems Model;
Management of Complexity (Abstraction, Modelling, best Practices, Patterns, Standards, Use of Appropriate Tools);
Adaptability; Professionalism (Life-long Learning, Professional Development, Ethics, Responsibility, Interpersonal
Skills, Data versus Information).
Reference Books:
i. J. A. Senn, Information Technology: Principles, Practices, Opportunities, Pearson Education, 2003.
ii. D. Cyganski, and J. A. Orr, Information Technology: Inside and Outside, Prentice Hall, 2001.
iii. E. Turban, K. R. Rainer, and R. E. Porter, Introduction to Information Technology, Whiley and Sons Inc.,
2007.
iv. J. Baschab, J. Piot N. G Garr, The Executive's Guide to Information Technology, Whiley and Sons Inc.,
2007.
v. E. G. Walters, The Essential Guide to Computing: The Story of Information Technology, Prentice Hall Inc.,
2000.
vi. L. Snyder, Fluency with Information Technology: Skills, Concepts, and Capabilities, 3rd edition, Addison-
Wesley, 2007.
vii. B. Williams and S. Sawyer, Using Information Technology, Career Education, 2009.
CSC 1106 Programming Methodology I (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to create a strong base in the principles and practice of functional programming.
A high level programming language lie C is to be used. The students are to cover both theoretical principles and
hands on practical skills. The main concepts to cover include Programme structure, data structures, syntactical and
semantic correctness, planning and segmentation in programming as well as working with data files. The aims of the
course are to provide the student with: Comprehensive knowledge about structured oriented programming;
Knowledge in planning and organization of programming projects; Knowledge and techniques of evaluating
syntactic and semantic correctness of a computer Programme and; Strong practical basis in programming.
Indicative Content: Programme structure; Variables and Operators; Conditional statements; Looping statements;
Arrays and strings; Functions; Advanced data types; Pointers; Dynamic memory allocation and dynamic structures;
Working with files and GUI.
Reference Books:
i. B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, C Programming Language, 2nd edition, 1989.
ii. S. P. Harbison, C: A Reference Manual, 5th edition, 2004.
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business (3 CU)
Course Description: The course covers the integration of Information and Communication Technologies into
organizations and their working practices, from design and implementation to strategic effects. Drawing on
Information Systems (IS) and Management literature, the course offers a chance for students to examine case studies
of IS successes and failures and to explore ’real-world’ IS management issues.
The course aims to provide students with knowledge for understanding the integration of business and technology
resources to facilitate effective and efficient realization of an organization’s mission and objectives.
Indicative Content: An information systems model: An Information System uses the resources of people,
hardware, software, data, and networks to perform input, processing, output, storage and control activities that
covert data resources into information products; Role of Information Systems in an organization; the shift from data
processing Systems via information Systems to knowledge-Based Systems; How information and knowledge add
value to an organization; Information Systems Trends; the Information Technology component of Information
Systems; Information Systems Engineering. Strategic planning: Organizational strategies and objectives; Human
resource development: budgeting, costing, charging, hire versus buy decisions; Hardware and software procurement:
70

equest for proposal, evaluation, selection, contracting and maintenance; Security in computing: continuity of
processes, controls and planning for standby; Computer audit; Project management: approaches, tools, site planning
and installation.
Reference Books:
i. G. Curtis, Business Information Systems: Analysis, Design and Practice, 1995.
ii. P. Bocij, D. Chaffey, A. Greasley, S. Hickie, Business Information Systems: Technology, Development and
Management for the E-Business, 2005.
BIT 1204 Information Management (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is important to the management, productivity and differentiation of an
organization. Information is derived from data. This means that data must be efficiently collected, organized,
retrieved and managed to make it meaningful to the organization. Thus, the development, deployment, management
and integration of data and information systems to support the organization are a vital role of the IT professional.
Consequently, the knowledge area of Information Management should include the collection, organization,
modelling, transformation, presentation, safety and security of the data and information. This course is aimed at
giving students the skills needed to efficiently collect, organize, model, transform, present, and secure data and
information. Students will learn how to integrate information with Information Systems to make it meaningful to the
Organization.
Indicative Content:
• Concepts and fundamentals of Information management. Information system: purpose, use and value;
Properties of data (quality, accuracy, timelines); Database systems; Analysis of data, forms & sources;
Data collection and retention; Information backup and recovery;
• Database Query Languages; SQL data manipulation, data definition and performance tuning/optimization
XQuery and Xpath; Reports; Query by example and by optimization.
• Data Organization Architecture: Data models, Hierarchical, network and relational models; Object and
Object-relational databases; Logical, XML/XMI databases; Semantic and dimensional models; Star
schema; Normalization and Data Integrity.
• Data modelling: Conceptual, logical and physical models; Reengineering of Databases; Standardized
modeling in IDEF1, UML; CASE tools and data integration; Data Integration (data warehouses and data
marts).
• Managing the Database Environment: Data and Database administration; Distributed databases and patterns
of distribution; Client server databases; N-tier architectures.
• Special-purpose databases (text, multimedia Temporal, spatial, mobile, scientific/genomic); Decision
support; Knowledge management and information retrieval (digital libraries)
Reference Books:
i. C. T., Begg C. Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and Management.
USA: Pearson Education Limited, 2002.
ii. E. Turban., E. McLean and J. Wetherbe, Information Technology for Management: Making Connections
for Strategic Advantage, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1998.
CSC 1204 Research Methodology (3 CU)
Course Description: The purpose of this course is to acquaint students with types of scientific research relevant for
anyone working in the field of computer science. It will enable students to develop capacity to conduct small, simple
research projects while at the university. The aims of the course are to provide the student with: Enable students
become competent in understanding the research process. Provide skills that will enable students undertake
independent research using a variety of appropriate methods, using primary and secondary data, as well as
71

qualitative and quantitative techniques. Provide students with skills to produce a research proposal and highlight
ethical research practices to students.
Indicative Content: Introduction to scientific research; Formulating and clarifying the research topic and research
problem; Conducting a literature review; Different research approaches; Ethics in research; Sampling; Use of
secondary data; Collection methods for primary data; Analyzing qualitative data; Analyzing quantitative data and
writing a research proposal and project report.
Reference Books:
i. H. Cooper, Synthesizing Research: A Guide for Literature Reviews, Thousand oaks, California: Sage
Publications, 1998.
ii. M. Sounders, P. Lewis, & A. Thornhill, Research Methods for Students , 3rd edition, UK, Financial times,
Prentice hall, 2003.
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: This course covers ASP.NET development fundamentals, providing hands-on experience
through the building of a fully functional time and expense tracking application like TimeEx. Starting with an
overview of server-side technologies, it then goes into the C# (C Sharp) programming language commonly used for
ASP.NET and database development utilizing MSDE (Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine). Particular attention
is given to techniques for integrating ASP.NET pages with the advanced client-side (DHTML) technologies covered
first.
Indicative Content: ASP.NET development fundamentals; Server-side technologies; Interaction of web application
with SQL Database; Integration of ASP.NET pages into advanced client-side technologies
Reference Books:
i. Z. Ruvalcaba, Build Your Own ASP.NET Website Using C# &VB.NET, 1st edition, 2005.
ii. P. J. Deite and H. M. Deitel, Internet & World Wide Web: How to Programme, Prentice Hall; 4th edition,
2007.
iii. S. Walther, ASP.NET Unleashed: unleashed, Sams Publishing, 2003.
iv. K. Kalata, Internet Programming with VBScript and JavaScript (Web warrior series), Course Technology,
1st edition, 2000.
CSC 1207 Programming Methodology II (3 CU)
Course Description: The course is to give an in depth understanding of Object Oriented programming. It is to cater
for Object Oriented Programming practices like inheritance, interfaces, exception handling, action handling,
security, software reuse and robustness. The aim of the course is to: Move the students’ programming skills from
basic to advanced; Avail students with skills to handle non functional Programme aspects like robustness and
security and train students to develop complete computer applications.
Indicative Content: The object oriented paradigm; Classes and objects; Inheritance and visibility modifiers;
Interfaces and abstract classes; Graphical user interface and action handlers; Exception handling; Working with
files; Working with databases; Sessions and user management.
Reference Books:
i. J. Lewis and W. Loftus, Java Software Solution: Foundations of Programme Design 4th edition, 2008.
ii. K. A. Mughal and R. W. Rasmussen, A Programmer’s Guide to JavaTM Certification: A Comprehensive
Primer, 3rd edition, 2008.
BIT 2103 Electronic Commerce (3 CU)
72

Course Description: The course aims to provide students with the skills required to design, implement and evaluate
robust ecommerce applications. The theory and application of electronic commerce solutions on the internet to
improve business profit are presented. The techniques, tools and infrastructure required for on-line transactions are
presented. The course includes a major group project, which draws on a wide range of skills of team members to set
up an integrated electronic business. Issues such as business-to-business transactions are also covered.
Indicative Content: Computerized trading systems, electronic funds transfer, automatic product identification and
bar code technology, electronic data interchange; the infrastructure of electronic commerce; electronic payment
systems; Electronic commerce retailing and corporate finance; Intranets and supply chain management; remote
banking, procurement and purchasing, online marketing and advertisement, home shopping, and auctions.
Ecommerce security issues, transaction integrity and electronic payment systems are considered; and legal aspects of
ecommerce.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Rayport and G. J. Jaworski, Introduction to e-Commerce, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
ii. J. F. Rayport and G. J. Jaworski,. Cases in e-Commerce, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
iii. E. Turban, et al., Electronic Commerce, a Managerial Perspective, Upper Saddle River, NJ; Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2004.
iv. G. P. Schneider, Electronic Commerce: The Second Wave, Boston MA Thompson Course Technology,
2004.
BIT 2105 Electronic Media Systems and Multimedia (3 CU)
Course Description: This course provides a comprehensive overview of the various platforms, applications, media
and technology used to develop digital media products and communications. This course will investigate the use of
several software tools for multimedia production and the ways in which media components can be represented and
integrated into final multimedia production. The course aims at:- Introducing students to the concepts of electronic
media, the systems there of and the general field of multimedia.
Indicative Content: Introduction to digital graphics, photography, video, audio, networked multimedia and
authoring; Visual design skills: leading to Graphic Design and other major areas of Multimedia Production,
including a variety of design techniques using specialist software to design and manipulate images.
Reference Books:
i. R. Steinmetz and K. Nahrstedt, Multimedia Systems, Springer 2004.
ii. Z- Nian Li and M. S. Drew, Fundamentals of Multimedia, Prentice Hall 2003.
iii. R. Steinmetz and K. Nahrstedt, Multimedia Applications, Springer 2004.
BIT 2107 Web Systems and Technologies I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course aims to: Provide an understanding of the basics of the Internet, how it originated,
how it works, and how to develop and maintain Web sites; Provide a basic understanding of Internet related
technologies and introductory skills in Web applications. On completion of this course unit, the students will be able
to: Have essential skills for website management; demonstrate understanding of the basic Internet technology
concepts and; Develop a prototype of interactive World Wide Web applications.
Indicative Content: HTML editors; website management tools such as FrontPage and/or Dream weaver; Basic
Internet technologies such as DNS, email services, LDAP and the HTTP protocol; Introduction to tools and
techniques for specifying and prototyping interactive World Wide Web applications based on HTML. Web
technologies: HTTP Protocol, Presentation abstractions, Web-markup and display languages.
Reference Books:
73

i. A. Homer, C. Ullman & S. Wright, Instant HTML Programmer’s Reference, Wrox, 1998.
ii. H. M. Deitel, P. J. Deitel & T. R. Nieto, Internet & World Wide Web – How to Programme, Prentice Hall,
2000.
iii. H. M. Deitel, P. J. Deitel, T. R. Nieto, T. M. Lin & P. Sadhu , XML – How to Programme, Prentice Hall,
2000.
iv. Website:: www.W3schools.com
BIT 2108 Information Technology II (3 CU)
Course Description: A necessary pre-requisite for this course is Information Technology I. This course continues
an overview of the discipline of IT, describes how it relates to other computing disciplines, and finally instills an IT
mindset. The course aims at giving the students main guidelines for the future study of IT-related courses; Develop
knowledge and understanding of the elements of a feasible IT application. On completion of this course unit,
students will be able to: Develop knowledge and understanding of the elements of a feasible IT application; the
extend and activities involved in an IT application; business processes; project management processes; integration
processes; history of computing technology and Internet; impacts of computing and IT on society, communication
and interaction, global processes; changes in human-computer interaction; the relationship between IT and other
disciplines (computing and non-computing).
Indicative Content:
• Organizational Issues: How to introduce IT applications; Dissemination of innovation and change agency;
Integration of processes; Business process redesign; Cost benefit analysis; Project Management
• History of Information Technology: History of Computing Technology; Social History of Computing
Impacts; Development of User interaction; and History of the Internet
• IT and Its Related and Informing Disciplines: Definition of IT; Computer Science; Software Engineering;
Information Systems; Cognitive Science; Computer Engineering; Mathematics and Statistics; Natural
Sciences, Linguistics, Sociology, Psychology, etc.
• Application Domains: Bio-informatics & medical applications; Business applications; Law enforcement;
Political processes; e-commerce; Manufacturing; Education; Entertainment; Agriculture etc.
• Application of Math and Statistics to IT: Functions, relations, and sets; Data representations and
encryptions; Basic logic used in programming; Applications of probability tools in solving problems;
Applications of statistical methods in solving problems
Reference Books:
i. J. A. Senn, Information Technology: Principles, Practices, Opportunities, Pearson Education, 2003.
ii. D. Cyganski and J. A. Orr, Information Technology: Inside and Outside, Prentice Hall, 2001.
iii. C. V. Brown, et al., Managing Information Technology, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
iv. G. Reynolds, Ethics in Information Technology, Course Technology, 2006.
v. K. Schwalbe, Information Technology Project Management, South-Western, Div of Thomson Learning,
2009.
BIT 2109 Integrative Programming and Technologies (4 CU)
Course Description: The course content is based on open source software such as PHP or closed source software
such Active Server Pages (ASP). The software to use will depend on the lecturer giving the course. Active Server
Pages (ASP) as a server side scripting architecture for building dynamic web applications, and an ideal environment
for building web based commerce solutions. On completion of this course unit, the students will be able to:
Programme in Java, C# and scripting languages such as JavaScript or PHP; Develop standalone and internet
applications using technologies such as xml and in popular frameworks such as ASP.NET; Create the necessary
74

connections and scripts in order that one or more servers can share data from one or more data sources; Integrate
databases which are dissimilar in structure, platform and DBMS.
Indicative Content: HTML; Scripting languages; Server side scripting architecture and building dynamic web
applications; Web development in any language, including Visual Basic, C++, and J++ programming; Integrative
technologies e.g. XML technologies and protocols
Reference Books:
i. M. Wilson and T. Wilson, XML Programming with VB and ASP.
ii. B. Brogden et al, Java Developers Guide to E-Commerce with XML and JSP.
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is to provide students with a strong foundation in systematic approaches to design
and implementing of database applications. Preliminarily, operations like requirements gathering and database
planning will be covered. The course will also introduce students to developing of application Programmes that talk
to the database. These applications may be online or offline. The aims of the course are to: Provide a background for
the evolution of database (management) systems; Provide the students with the steps one has to go through when
developing good database applications; Give hand on experience and knowledge in developing database (driven)
applications
Indicative Content: Background to databases; Evolution of database systems; Database organization and
architecture; Data base models; Over view of database application development; The database development life
cycle; Database design; Conceptual design; Logical design; Physical Design; Querying databases; SQL/PL SQL
and Scripting.
Reference Books:
i. T. Connolly and C. Begg, Database Solutions, 2nd Edition.
CSC 2200 Operating Systems (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces students to software that controls hardware and makes the hardware
usable. Its interaction with other computer devises and how it controls other computer processes is explored. The
course aims to: Provide students with a detailed understanding of how operating systems work; Provide students
with skills to write basic Programmes to utilize underlying operating system infrastructures. The dominant
categories of operating systems are Windows and UNIX (Linux, Mac OS, Solaris, etc). On completion of this course
unit, the students will be able to: Have a proper understanding of the differences between these two operating
systems Understand different design principles for operating systems and various software tools that make operating
systems usable.
Indicative Content: Operating Systems Structures; Processes and threads; Thread creation, manipulation and
synchronization; Deadlock; Implementing Synchronization operations; CPU scheduling; Memory management; File
systems and file system implementation; Monitors; Segments; Disk Scheduling; Networking; UDP and TCP.
Reference Books:
i. W. Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 4th edition, 2007.
BIT 2201 Marketing in the IT Sector (3 CU)
Course Description: A marketing orientation drives strategic decision-making in most companies today. The
business press is constantly discussing the efforts of companies to get close to their customers or to meet their needs
better than the competition. Indeed, it is impossible to understand the current and potential financial success of
companies today without a thorough understanding of their target markets, customer relationships, product
development skills, and competitive advantages and disadvantages. Marketing is all about creating and capturing
value. By providing superior value to customers, companies enhance their own value. The marketing concept is so
pervasive in companies that a marketing orientation extends well beyond the marketing department. Marketing has
75

ecome everyone’s job. This course will enable students to apply marketing tools and concepts, whether you work
in the marketing department or not.
Indicative Content: Introduction to Marketing Strategy; Analyzing Buyer Behavior; Segmentation; Targeting, and
Positioning; Analyzing Competition; Strategy over the Product Life Cycle; Developing New Products; Advertising
& Communication; Pricing; Sales Promotion; Channels of Distribution; Branding; Customer Relationship
Management; The Internet as the Holy Grail of Marketing.
Reference Books:
i. W. G. Zikmund, R. Macleod, F. W. Gilbert, Customer Relationship Management: Integrating Marketing
Strategy and Information Technology, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
ii. M. Samil, International Business and Information Technology: Interaction and Transformation in the
Global Economy, Routledge, 2004.
iii. B. Silverstein, Internet Marketing for Information Technology Companies: Proven Online Techniques That
Increase Sales and Profits for Hardware, Software, and Networking Companies Maximum Press, 2001.
iv. R. Kerin, S. Hartley, W. Rudelius, Marketing, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2008.
v. W. M. Pride, O. C. Ferrell, Marketing, South-Western College Pub, 2007.
vi. J. P. Peter and J. Donelly, Preface to Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2007.
vii. P. Kotler, G. Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2007.
viii. M. Butje, Product Marketing for Technology Companies, Butterworth -Heinemann, 2005.
ix. E. Artech, Successful Marketing Strategy for High-Tech Firms, House Publishers, 2004.
CSC 2202 Systems Analysis and Design (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces established and evolving methodologies for the analysis and design of
an information system. Great emphasis is placed on system characteristics, managing projects, prototyping,
CASE/OOM tools, systems development life cycle phases, the role of the systems analyst, systems selection,
definition of systems requirements, feasibility analysis, system design, and system architecture are topics included.
Upon completion, students should be able to analyze a problem and design an appropriate solution using a
combination of tools and techniques.
Indicative Content:
• SAD Fundamentals: Introduction to IS & types of IS; Need for SAD & role of Analyst; SDLC & use of
CASE tools; Determining feasibility & mgt of SAD activities.
• Information Requirements Analysis Information gathering (Interactive methods, unobtrusive methods,
RAD, prototyping); Determining Systems requirements (types of requirements)
• The Analysis Process: Structuring systems requirements (describing process specifications & structured
decisions) Data modelling; Process modelling; Preparing System proposals.
• The Design Process: Designing effective output; Designing effective input (Accurate Data entry
Procedures); User Interface design; Database Design.
• System Implementation: Quality Assurance through Software Engineering (design with structured charts,
testing, maintenance, auditing, Quality mgt); Implementing Information Systems (user training, conversion
strategies, systems evaluation
• Project Management: Stages of system Development; Project planning; Estimation & Project Monitoring &
Control
• Introduction to Object-oriented Systems Analysis & Design using UML
76

Reference Books:
i. Kendall & Kendall, Systems Analysis and Design, 6th edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005.
ii. J. A. Hoffer, , J. F. George and J. S. Valacich , Modern Systems Analysis and Design, 2nd edition,
Addison-Wesley, 1999.
BSE 2203 Computer Networks & Data Communication (4 CU)
Course Description: This course will cover Introduction to Networks: definition, advantages, types, configurations;
The OSI/ISO reference model; Transmission media: magnetic media, twisted pair, coaxial, fiber-optics; Data
encoding: straight, Manchester, differential Manchester, satellite; Digital versus Analog transmission; Modems,
modulation and their standards, codes and pulse code modulation; Integrated Services Digital Networks (ISDN);
Network Access Protocols; Passive versus dynamic allocation; LAN
standards: 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.4 (token bus), 802.5 (token ring); Computer Network security, Active and Passive
Attacks; Network layer and Network layer protocols; Transport layer and Transport layer protocols. Furthermore,
the course considers problems on each layer of a multilayered communication model, and describes some typical
solutions to such problems. On completion of this course unit, the students will be able to: Master the terminology
and concepts of the OSI reference model and the TCP/IP reference model; Master the concepts of protocols,
network interfaces, and design/performance issues in local area networks and wide area networks; Demonstrate
knowledge of wireless networking concepts; Appreciate contemporary issues in networking technologies and
demonstrate knowledge of network tools.
Indicative Content: Network services and applications: DNS, HTTP, SMTP, peer-to peer systems; Network
transport architectures, TCP, UDP, TCP congestion control; Routing and forwarding, intra-domain, inter-domain
routing algorithms and Mobile IP; Link layers and local area networks, Ethernet, WiFi, and mobility; Multimedia
communications and quality of service; Network measurement, inference, and management; Network security
(ACL, IPSec, etc); Network programming; Network experimentation and performance analysis and Protocol
verification.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Kurose and K. W. Ross. Computer Networking - A Top down Approach Featuring the Internet, 3rd
edition, Addison-Wesley.
ii. L. Peterson and B. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach, Morgan Kauffmann Publishers, 3rd
edition, 2003.
BIT 2205 System Administration (3 CU)
Course Description: This course addresses both the technology of computer systems and the users of the
technology on an equal basis. It is about putting together a network of computers, getting them running and then
keeping them running in spite of the activities of users who tend to cause the systems to fail. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Demonstrate understanding of computer networking, computing models,
and basic network services and plan, Install, Maintain and Run a Unix/Linux System as used in a TCP/IP networked
environment.
Indicative Content: Manage system resources including processes, memory and disk space; Maintain and interpret
log files; Configure and manage a DNS service; Create and manage user accounts; Configure and manage an email
system; Install and manage shared applications; Use shell scripts to automate procedures; Understand and manage
cross-platform file services; Understand and manage Windows/Unix/Linux printing systems; Monitor, analyze and
tune system performance; Manage and configure virus protection strategies; Implement any other security measures;
Perform system upgrades and version management; Perform system backup and recovery procedures
77

Reference Books:
i. M. Burgess, Principles of Network and System Administration, Published by Wiley and Sons, 2nd edition,
2004.
ii. www.tldp.org
BIT 2206 Professional Law and Ethics (2 CU)
Course Description: A necessary pre-requisite for this course is Information Technology I. This course aims to
develop in-depth knowledge and understanding of Computer Law and Ethics major issues; It provides the students
with the survival legal kit necessary for their future carrier as IT professionals and form an adoption of IT
professional ethics/code of conduct. The course provides a survival kit for IT graduates entering the work force. The
course also considers computer ethical issues, such as information privacy, computer crime, computer terrorism,
identity theft, ethical hacking etc. Each issue is analyzed in terms of the major ethical theories.
Indicative Content:
This course gives in-depth knowledge of computing law and ethics topics introduced earlier in pervasive themes of
Information Technology. It is intended for IT undergraduate students who generally have little (or none) work
experience in the IT industry. First, the course considers the international and national legal frameworks related to
IT. A variety of computer crimes as far as responsibility for committing such crimes are discussed. Other issues
include legal protection of IT development - non-disclosure agreements, employment contracts, intellectual property
law (copyright, patent, licensing, and royalties), trademarks and warranty disclaimers.
Reference Books:
i. J. M. Kizza, Ethical and Social Issues in the Informational Age, 2nd edition, Springer- Verlag, New York,
Inc. 2003.
ii. P. Quirk, J. Forder, Electronic Commerce and The Law. 2nd edition. John Wiley & Sons, Australia, 2003.
iii. E. Lawrence, B. Corbitt, J. Fisher, J. Lawrence, A. Tidwell, Internet Commerce-Digital Models for
Business, 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons Australia 2000.
iv. D. G. Johnson, Computer Ethics, Prentice Hall, 2nd edition, 1994.
v. P. Knight and J. Fitzsimmons,The Legal Environment of Computing, Addison- Wesley, 1990.
BIT 2301: Industrial Training (4 CU)
Course Description: The students shall acquire hands on training in maintenance, servicing and troubleshooting,
and training in computer skills and applications. Hardware maintenance; Practicals; On job training; Report writing.
BIT 3102 Entrepreneurship and Business (3 CU)
Course Description: This course offers an overview of the entrepreneurial process. Students will develop a
business plan using their own business idea. They will learn skills and characteristics of successful entrepreneurs,
techniques for evaluating business opportunities, planning tools, selling and marketing basics, financial analysis,
record keeping, laws and regulations of Uganda, and step by step procedures for starting a small business.
Indicative Content:
• Identification of talents and skills required to be a successful entrepreneur; Personal talents; Technical
skills; Educational background
• Overview of business opportunities: Trade association reports; Government reports; Demographic
information and Surveys.
• Business entry strategies: Steps in starting a business; Purpose of business; Description of business;
Starting a business versus buying a business
• Planning: Setting goals; Operational approach.
78

• Laws and regulations affecting a small business in Uganda: CAP and Local bye laws
• Sources of information and assistance; Trade association and other non-governmental sources; Local, state,
and federal governmental sources; Small business analysis
• Description of a comprehensive business plan; Reason for preparing a business plan; Types of business
plans; Form of business plan; Contents of a successful business plan.
• Outline of a business plan: Preparation of an executive summary; Establishment of company strategy;
Development of a marketing plan; Sales strategy; financial plan.
• Completion of the business plan; Writing the plan; Outside review of the plan.
• Social and Ethical Responsibility
Reference Books:
i. B. R. Barringer & R. D. Ireland, Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New ventures. Published by
Pearson-Prentice Hall. 1st edition, 2006.
ii. T. W. Zimmerer and N. M. Scarborough, Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management.
4th edition, 2005.
BIS 3102 Human Computer Interaction (3 CU)
Course Description: This course covers: Introduction to the interdisciplinary area of Human Computer Interaction
(HCI); the underlying principles of psychology, computer science and ergonomics that influence theory and practice
of HCI design and usage; specific topics will include: models of human information processing, organizational
structures and socio-technical approaches to information system design; design principles for dialogue management;
issues of systems user-ability; hypertext; natural language processing; virtual reality and multimedia applications.
The course aims to provide students with knowledge and skills in human factors with respect to interactive software,
characteristics of design processes, principles and guidelines of interface design, virtual environments with respect
to interfaces, corporate and business aspects of human computer interaction, interface aspects of response times and
presentation, interaction devices.
Indicative Content: Conceptual systems models; Interface design and evaluation; Systems engineering and systems
design factors; Assessments; Software tools; Virtual environments; Menus and dialogues; Command and natural
languages; Interface devices; Response times; Complexity; Information attributes; Human factors and attributes;
Tasks; Cognitive modelling; Function mapping; Hypermedia; Societal considerations and ethics and Internet/web
considerations
Reference Books:
i. A. Dix, J. Finlay, G. Abowd, R. Beale, Human Computer Interaction, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
ii. A. Sears and J. A. Jacko, The Human – Computer Interaction Handbook, 2008.
iii. H. Sharp, Y. Rodgers and J. Preece, Interaction Design: Beyond Human Computer Interaction, John
Wiley & Sons; 2nd edition, 2007.
CSC 3103 User Interface Design (4 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces the principles of user interface development, focusing on design,
implementation and evaluation. The course aims at providing the skills listed below to students: Developing
efficient, flexible and interactive User Interfaces (UI); Provide ability to identifying system users, the tasks they
want to carry out and the environment in which they will be working; Creating conceptual designs; Designing
various kinds of UI, in particular graphical user interfaces (GUIs) and websites; evaluating UIs; Appreciation of
realities of developing usable UIs in an organization.
Indicative Content: Usability; User-Centered Design; UI Software Architecture; Human Capabilities; Output
Models; Conceptual Models and Metaphors; Input Models; Design Principles; Paper Prototyping; Constraints and
79

Layouts; Graphic Design; Computer Prototyping; Heuristic Evaluation; User Testing; Experiment Design and
Experiment Analysis.
Reference Books:
i. D. A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things, New York, NY: Doubleday, 1990.
ii. J. Nielsen, Usability Engineering. Burlington, MA: Academic Press, 1994.
iii. K. Mullet and D. Sano, Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication Oriented Techniques. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1994.
BIT 3104 Business Communication and Report Writing (3CU)
Course Description: Information oils the wheels of an organization! Communication enables the organizational
development and growth in all its aspects. Communication is becoming a critical factor to organizational growth and
development. It is also a fact that governments and organizations that effectively communicate tend to succeed in
achieving their intentions. This course is designed to expand your knowledge of Business communication and to
hone your communication skills. In particular the course will particularly pay close attention to developing
purposive, clear, concise, communication styles and sensitivity to various audiences’ needs and interests.
Indicative Content:
Overview of communications; definitions, processes; and types; New technologies and communication, Noise and
Barriers to effective communication; Understanding the Business set up and processes; Principles of Effective
Communication; Planning and Writing Effective Messages; Preparing and Producing Newsletters; Effective Report
Writing for Business Organizations; Backgrounders & Position Papers; Effective Oral Presentations; Holding
Successful Business Meetings; Opinion Articles (Op-Ed) & Letters to the Editor; Communicating via the Web;
Crisis Communication; Inter-Cultural Communication; Communication Ethic; Communicating in a Team
Environment.
Reference Books:
i. C. L. Bovee, J. V. Thill, B. E. Schatzman, Business Communication Today, 7th edition. New Dehli:
Pearson Education, 2003.
ii. H. A. Murphy, H. W. Hilderbrandt & J. P. Thomas, Effective Business Communications. Boston, MA:
Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 1997.
BIT 3105 Web Systems and Technologies II (3 CU)
Course Description: This course reviews some of the more advanced features of the Internet and electronic. This
unit provides the principles and skills of web application development. It arms students with current web
programming technology and the skills for developing web oriented applications. Topics covered are web
development, from a web page to a web site, types of servers and architectures for web sites.
Indicative Content: Web development approaches and architectures; Security, performance, scalability, and
maintainability of the different web development approaches; Web-enabled databases; Dynamic web pages for B2C
and B2B sites; Web security and legal issues; Projects will be prototype business systems which include dynamic
database access; Graphical design issues; Client-side programming and server-side programming; Web services and
servers; Emerging technologies; Standards and Standard Bodies; Web information architecture.
Reference Books:
i. A. Homer, C. Ullman & S. Wright; Instant HTML Programmer’s Reference, Wrox, 1998.
ii. H. M. Deitel, P. J. Deitel & T. R. Nieto, Internet & World Wide Web – How to Programme, Prentice Hall,
2000.
iii. P. J. Deitel, T. R. Nieto, T. M. Lin, H. M. Deitel, & P. Sadhu, XML – How to Programme, Prentice Hall,
2000.
iv. Website: www.W3schools.com.
80

BIT 3106 Software Engineering for Internet Applications (4 CU)
Course Description: This course unit shall cover challenges of concurrency (say 1000 people might be using the
system at the same time), unpredictable load (say 100,000 users might show up tomorrow even if only 100 are using
the system today), security risks, opportunity for wide-area distributed computing, creating a reliable and state-full
user experience on top of unreliable connections and stateless protocols, extreme requirements and absurd
development schedules , requirements that change mid-way through a project, sometimes because of experience
gained from testing with users, user demands for a multi-modal interface: Web, mobile (WAP), and voice. Modern
internet applications exhibit a form of online community in which customers are an integral part of the system.
Indicative Content: This is a course for students who already have some programming experience; Basics
(Stateless vs. State-full), planning for Internet applications, software structure; User registration and Management,
Content Management; Software modularity, Discussion boards, adding mobile users to the community; Voice
(VoiceXML), Scaling Gracefully, Search, and distributed computing with HTTP, SOAP, and WSDL.
Reference Books:
i. E. Andersson, P. Greenspun, and A. Grumet, Software Engineering for Internet Applications, MIT Press,
2006.
BIT 3200 Business Intelligence and Data Warehousing (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces the student on how companies can build data warehouses and utilize
business intelligence for decision-making hence saving money and increasing profit. Several, initiatives ranging
from supply chain integration to compliance with organizational/government-mandated reporting requirements
depend on well designed data warehouse architecture. Therefore the course introduces you to the main components
of a data warehouse for business intelligence applications. This will include how a data warehouse fits into the
overall strategy of a complex enterprise, how to develop data models, data mats useful for business intelligence, and
how to combine data from disparate sources into a single database that comprises the core of your data warehouse.
The course will also explore how to define and specify useful management reports from warehouse data.
Indicative content: Data warehouse concepts: partitioning, granularity, record of source, and metadata; Building
viable decision support environments; Architect development; Data migration and integration; Use of operational
data stores, and transactional systems.
Reference books:
i. P. Ponniah, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, 2001.
BIT 3203 Mobile Networks and Computing (4 CU)
Course Description: This course examines principles, design, implementation, and performance of mobile
computing and wireless networking. The aim is to lay a foundation in the student's understanding and skills in
mobile computing and wireless networking standards, technologies, application and services. Ideally the course is an
integration of Wireless Networking and Mobile Computing. Subjects of study under Mobile Networking will
include; Wireless Network technologies (including GSM/GPRS/3G & Wireless LANs), Convergence networks,
NextGen, Mobile IP, wireless ATM, Wireless Ad Hoc Networks and Bluetooth; While subjects of discussion under
Mobile Computing will include; Mobile Computing Architectures (including SMS/SIM, WAP, I-mode and
J2ME/J2EE), mobile OS (e.g., Android) and Mobile Application Development including location–based services.
The aims of the course include: to introduce students to the theory and practice of Mobile networking and
computing.
Indicative Content: Knowledge in the following (Computer Networking; Programming Principles, and Java );
Introduction to mobile computing and wireless networking principles; The Blue Tooth and Zigbee short range
wireless technologies; The Wi-Fi Technologies; Introduction to GSM/GPRS/3G/3GPP; The Mobile IP technology;
Wireless ATM technology; Introduction to Mobile application development; Introduction to J2ME and J2EE
platforms; understanding mobile computing architectures (I-mode, SMS and WAP) and introduction to GSM
gateways e.g. Kannel
81

Reference Books:
i. J. Schiller, Mobile Communications, Addison-Wesley, 2000.
ii. M. Beaulieu, Wireless Internet Applications & Architectures: Building Professional Wireless Applications
Worldwide, Addison-Wesley, 2002.
iii. Q. H. Mahmoud, Learning – Wireless Java, O’Reilly, 2002.
iv. T. Imielinski and H. K. Kluwer, Introduction to Mobile Computing in Mobile Computing, Academic
Publishers, 1996.
v. J. W. Muchow, Core J2ME, Technology & MIDP, Prentice-Hall, 2002.
vi. S. Allamaraju, Professional Java Server Programming J2EE 1, 3rd edition, Wrox Press Ltd, 2001.
vii. S. Mann, Programming Applications with Wireless Application Protocol, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2000.
viii. S. B. Guthery and M. J. Cronin, Mobile Application Development with SMS and The SIM Toolkit,
McGraw-Hill TELECOM, 2000.
ix. N. Rhodes & J. McKeehan, Palm Programming: The Developer’s Guide, O’Reilly, 1999.
x. M. Hapner, Java Message Service API Tutorial and Reference – Messaging for the J2EE Platform, Sun
Microsystems, 2002.
BIT 3206 Information Assurance and Security (4 CU)
Course Description: This course will offer the students a holistic overview to security issues pertinent in an
enterprise. The course will specifically tackle Security mechanisms, Operational issues, Policy, Attacks, Security
Domains, Forensics, Information States, Security Services, threat analysis model, Vulnerabilities. The course will
also present introductory aspects on confidentiality, integrity, authentication, non-repudiation, intrusion detection,
physical security, and encryption. A student completing this course will be
expected to have a good understanding of the information assurance issues of an Enterprise. This course aims at:
Introducing students to the concepts of Information Assurance and how to secure such information using appropriate
systems and technologies.
Indicative Content: Security mechanisms; Operational issues; Policy Attacks; Security Domains; Forensics;
Information States; Security Services; Threat analysis model; Vulnerabilities; Introduction: confidentiality,
integrity, authentication, non-repudiation, intrusion detection, physical security, and encryption.
Reference Books:
i. Nestler, A. Conklin, G. White and M. Hirsch, Computer Security Lab Manual (Information Assurance &
Security), Career Education, 2005.
ii. C. P. Pfleeger and S. L. Pfleeger, Security in Computing, 4th edition, Prentice Hall 2006.
BIT 3207 System Integration and Architecture (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is designed to provide students with an understanding of Systems Integration (SI)
process, approaches, drivers, tools and techniques required for successful SI, critical success factors, and best
practices. The course focuses on how a proposed system will be integrated with other existing or planned systems. It
addresses the System Integration problem using architectures as the basis and then addresses the evaluation of the
architectures in terms of the capabilities they provide. Case studies and examples from the Information Technology
(IT), energy, and financial services industry will be used to illustrate the concepts discussed.
Indicative Content:
• The System of Systems Integration Problem – Human, Organizational, Societal Cultural, Economic, and
Technological aspects; Processes, approaches, drivers, tools and techniques required for successful SI, critical
success factors, and best practices in Systems Integration; The Role of Architectures in Systems Integration;
Integration in a System of Systems and a Federation of Systems; Model Based Architecture, Design, and
Integration; Systems of Systems Interoperability; Evaluation of architectures; Measures of Performance and
82

Effectiveness; Assessment of System Capabilities; Analysis of Alternatives; Case studies and examples from the
Information Technology (IT), energy, and financial services industry to illustrate the concepts discussed.
• The theory and practice of business process integration, legacy integration, new systems integration, business-tobusiness
integration, integration of commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) products, interface control and management,
testing, integrated Programme management, integrated Business Continuity Planning (BCP). Specific focus will be
given to issues of interface integration and interoperability of systems.
Reference Book:
i. A. P. Sage and W. B. Rouse, Handbook of Systems Engineering and Management, John Wiley & Sons,
1999.
BIT 3208 BIT Group Project (4 CU)
Course Description: To give the student experience in developing independent skills and implementing non-trivial
information technology research projects. Each student will pursue a lengthy project in any area of information
technology. The project will be specified, designed and implemented, with one of the Professors / lecturers as
advisor /supervisor.
83

8.0 DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS
8.1 Introduction
The Information System (IS) Department is one of the four academic departments at the Faculty of Computing and
Informatics Technology. The department provides both undergraduate and postgraduate courses. Some areas of
the study and research in IS include System Analysis and Design, Data warehouses, Databases, Health Informatics,
Management Information Systems and Decision Support Systems. These provide students with a thorough
knowledge of the field thus providing an enduring foundation for future professional growth. Information Systems
students learn to become problem solvers in organizations, institutions, the economy and society. The department
currently has two dynamic research groups namely: Simulation and Modelling Group and Visualization group.
The department has 15 full time academic staff and a diverse collection of part time faculty to support the teaching
needs for the Information Systems student community. Administrative staff members supervised by the Head of
Department ensure the smooth functioning of the department’s operations. Information systems specialists focus on
integrating information technology solutions and business processes to meet the information needs of businesses and
other enterprises, enabling them to achieve their objectives in an effective, efficient way. This discipline’s
perspective on information technology emphasizes information, and views technology as an instrument for
generating, processing, and distributing information. Professionals in the discipline are primarily concerned with the
information that computer systems can provide to aid an enterprise in defining and achieving its goals, and the
processes that an enterprise can implement or improve using information technology. They must understand both
technical and organizational factors, and they must be able to help an organization determine how information and
technology-enabled business processes can provide a competitive advantage.
The department has a reputation for good teaching in a friendly environment. We have an active research
programme and our staff and research students collaborate with other universities and industry around the world.
Our main research specialties are in Geographical Information Systems, Information Visualization, Systematic
Dynamics Modelling, and Simulation in Support for Decision Making and Health Informatics. Information System
(IS) graduates are perfectly placed to adapt their careers to the evolving workplace and new career opportunities.
Some of the roles IS graduates are able to fill include: Business analyst, Network analyst, Intelligence/threat analyst
for top government organization, Web developer, Creative Internet campaigner, Systems designer/engineer, Ecommerce
project officer, Assistive technology designer, Technical support analyst, Bioinformatics analyst, Change
and transition manager, IS security auditor, Information Systems Project manager, Information Systems consultant,
Database administrator, Analyst programmer, Development manager, Technical research officer, Business systems
consultant and IS manager.
8.2 Bachelor of Information Systems (BIS) Programme
8.2.1 Overview
The primary objective of the Bachelor of Information Systems (BIS) degree programme is to train students as
information systems specialists in a business organisation context. The BIS will equip students with knowledge and
skills for planning, modeling and applying ICT to meet an organization‘s business requirements that are generally
84
Dr. Agnes Rwashana Semwanga
Head of Department

depicted from the organization‘s stakeholders, events and products. The BIS Programme covers both business and
information technology subjects. The business subjects provide business practice framework for information
systems development, whilst the information technology subjects provide the knowledge and technical skills
required to build business information systems. The BIS programme aims to provide students with the concepts,
analytical and developmental skills required for the information systems that underpin business computer systems
and electronic commerce. The core units provide a foundation in the information systems areas of programming,
system design, database, and project management.
Objectives of the Programme are;
The objectives of the Bachelor of Information Systems programme are:
a) To build human resource capacity in information systems discipline in both the public and private
sectors, especially in universities;
b) To generate a pool of highly qualified candidates for the M.Sc. in Information Systems Degree
Programme;
c) To address the increasing demand for information systems training at bachelor’s degree level.
d) To develop professionals with theoretical and practical skills in the ICT sector.
1. Target Group
The programme targets two categories of people, namely Direct Entry and Diploma holders in relevant programmes.
2. Minimum Admission Requirements
To be admitted to the award of the Bachelor of Information Systems (BIS) Degree, a candidate must satisfy the general
admission requirements for Makerere University. In addition, the following regulations shall hold:
a) Direct Entry
A minimum weighted points set by the Admissions Board. For purposes of computing weighted points, the advanced
level subjects shall be grouped and weighted as follows:-
b) Diploma Holders
Group Weight Subjects
Essential 3 Any two best done subjects among: Mathematics, Physics,
Economics, Chemistry, Biology, Geography, Literature,
Entrepreneurship, Technical Drawing and Fine Art
Relevant 2 Any other best done subject of all A’ level subjects
Desirable 1 General Paper, Sub-Mathematics
Others 0.5 All others.
Applicants should possess at least a second class (lower division) Diploma in Computer Science any other diploma
with business or computing aspects from any recognized Institution.
3. Nature of the Programme
The day programme has both government and privately sponsored students. The evening programme has privately
sponsored students only.
4. Duration
The duration of this programme shall be three (3) academic years consisting of six semesters and two recess terms.
Each semester lasts for seventeen (17) weeks two (2) of which are for examinations.
85

5. Tuition Fees
Tuition fees for privately sponsored students shall be 2,600,000 Uganda Shillings per year for Ugandans and
5,050,000 Uganda Shillings per year for non Ugandans. This is the same tuition fees for the existing curriculum.
6. Semester Load and Minimum Graduation Load
The normal semester load is between 15 and 21 credit units. The minimum graduation load is 113 credit units
for courses passed including all the compulsory courses and required number of electives within a period
stipulated by the University.
8.2.2 Programme Structure
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Name CH LH TH PH CH
Semester 1:
BIS 1100 Foundations of Information Systems 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 1101 Communication for Information Systems Managers 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 1102 Business Statistics 3 45 -- -- 45
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 1100 Website Development & Internet Technology 3 30 -- -- 30
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 4 45 -- 30 60
Electives: (No Elective Course)
Semester 2:
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 1201 Distributed Information Systems 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 1200 Programming Methodology 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 4 45 30 -- 60
BIT 1200 Information Technology 3 45 -- -- 45
Year 1: Recess Term:
CSC 1301 Practical Skills Development 4 -- -- 120 60
CSC 1303 Cisco Certified Network Associate (Audited Course) 5 150 -- 100 200
Semester 3:
BIS 2100 Information Systems Security 4 45 30 -- 60
BIT 2100 Information Systems Development 4 45 30 -- 60
BIT 2101 Information Systems Management 3 45 30 -- 45
BIT 2102 Electronic Commerce 4 45 30 -- 60
Electives:(1 Elective Course)
BIS 2102 Knowledge-based Systems 3 45 -- -- 45
BIT 2105 Electronic Media Systems and Media 3 45 -- -- 45
Semester 4:
BIS 2200 Intelligent Systems 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 2202 Systems Analysis and Design 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 2203 Database Languages 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 2204 Research Design and Implementation 2 30 -- -- 60
Electives: (1 Elective Course)
BIS 2201 Executive Information Systems 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 2202 Selected Topics in Information Systems 4 60 -- -- 60
CSC 2200 Operating Systems 4 45 30 -- 60
Year 2: Recess Term:
86

BIS 2301 Industrial Training 4 -- -- 120 60
Semester 5:
BIS 3100 Modeling and Simulation 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 3101 Requirements Engineering for Organizational Systems 4 45 30 -- 60
BIS 3102 Human Computer Interaction 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 3107 Database Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
Electives: (1 Elective Course)
CSC 3101 Software Engineering 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 3103 User Interface Design 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 6:
BIS 3200 Project in Information Systems 4 -- -- -- --
BIS 3201 Strategic Management of Information Systems 3 45 -- -- 45
BIS 3203 E-Governance 4 45 30 -- 60
CSC 3209 Computer Networks 4 45 30 -- 60
Electives: (1 Elective)
BIT 3204 Enterprise Network Management 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 3205 Database (DB) Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
8.2.3 Course Unit Description
BIS 1100: Foundations of Information Systems (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should: View the organization as an
information processing system designed to manage environmental uncertainty; explain the operational, managerial
and strategic processes associated with Information Systems Management; Describe the ethical concerns associated
with information privacy, accuracy, intellectual property, and accessibility.
Indicative Content: This course aims at introducing students to the foundations of applying IT successfully; It will
cover basic concepts for understanding Information systems; business processes, information and databases,
communication, decision making and different types of information systems; product customer and competitive
advantage, human and ethical issues (computer hardware, software programming and artificial intelligence,
networks and telecommunications), information systems planning, building and maintaining information systems,
information system security and control, the future of information systems and customer relationship management.
Reference Books:
i. L. Zwass, Foundations of Information Systems, McGraw-Hill College, 1997.
ii. K. Lyytinen, Information Systems: The State of the Field (John Wiley Series in Information Systems),
Wiley, 2006.
iii. D. Hart and S. Gregor, Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising, Ed., ANU press,
2005.
BIS 1101: Communication for Information systems Managers (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should: Have an understanding and
appreciation of requisite communication techniques & approaches for managers of information systems.
Indicative Content: This course will focus on the value of effective communication in the management of
information systems including: common communication techniques and models and a review of their application in
management of information systems. The content will include: the importance of effective communication, writing
essays, reports & short business documents, working cooperatively in teams, and presenting group projects. It will
also provide an overview of communication theory and an insight into the processes of professional communication
and effective communication skills for interpersonal and collaborative contexts in the workplace.
87

Reference Books:
i. R. Plant and S. Murrell, An Executives Guide to Information Technology: Principles, Business Models,
and Terminology, Cambridge University press, 2007.
ii. S. Gordon, Computing Information Technology: The Human Side, IRM Press, 2003.
BIS 1102: Business Statistics (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should: Understand, and be able to
apply to real problems, the fundamental concepts of statistical thinking; Be able to appropriately apply basic tools of
data gathering, analysis and communication to real problems; Be able to integrate basic tools into an overall
approach to scientific inquiry.
Indicative Content: This unit covers simple and compound interest, time value of money, annuities, present and
future values, data classification and terminology, describing and displaying data, probability and probability
distributions, estimation and hypothesis testing, linear regression and correlation, index numbers and time series,
computer analysis of data using MINITAB and EXCEL.
Reference Books:
i. D. R. Anderson, D. J. Sweeney, T. A. Williams, and J. Freeman, Statistics for Business and Economics,
Thomson Learning; European edition, 2006.
ii. M. G. Sobol, Statistics for Business and Economics: An Action Learning Approach (McGraw-Hill series in
quantitative methods for management), 1982.
CSC 1100: Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; Equip students with skills of using common office
applications; Expose students to different operating systems; Equip students with skills of how to use the Internet;
and equip students with knowledge about common text editors in different operating systems. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; describe the historical evolution
of computers; Competently use the common office applications in at least two operating systems and competently
use common text editor in at least two operating systems.
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
BIT 1100: Website Development & Internet Technology (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should: Differentiate between the
Internet and the World Wide Web; Understand basic Internet technologies such as DNS, email services, HTTP and
LDAP; Create, publish and maintain websites using Microsoft FrontPage / Dream weaver;
Indicative Content: This course will provide an understanding of the basics of the Internet, how it originated, how
it works, and how to develop and maintain Web sites using HTML editors and site management tools such as
FrontPage and/or Dreamweaver. It will provide a basic understanding of Internet related technologies and
introductory skills in Web applications. It will introduce basic Internet technologies such as DNS, email services,
LDAP and the HTTP protocol. The practical part of this course will introduce tools and techniques for specifying
and prototyping interactive World Wide Web applications based on HTML.
88

Reference Books:
i. P. K. Yuen and V. Lau, Practical Web Technologies, Addison-Wesley, 2003.
ii. M. Miller, J. Wiley and Sons, 501 Web Site Secrets: Unleash the Power of Google, Amazon eBay and
More, 2004.
CSK 1101: Communication Skills (3 CU)
Course Description: This course provides students with skills of effective communication. These include verbal,
written, and gesture. The course aims at facilitating students appropriately and clearly communicate with others. The
aims of the course unit are to: Improve the communication competencies of the student; Improve problem solving
strategies of students; improve the art of critical thinking within the student; improve the student’s ability to collect
and synthesize information; provide students with knowledge to utilize the library and other educational resources.
Indicative Content:
• Writing Skills: Thinking critically/selectively before the writing process; selecting the relevant details;
organising the relevant details logically; writing the reports essays, letters and taking notes in appropriate
register; avoiding ambiguities, fallacies, irrationalities; providing supportive evidence; editing documents,
proof reading; writing and expanding information; Quoting and citing references; writing a curriculum
vitae.
• Reading Skills: The use of skimming; scanning inference and prediction in reading; Intensive and critical
reading; Acquisition of specific reading skills; Interpretation of non linear texts; Locating information and
comprehension.
• Speaking and Listening Skills to Enhance Effective Public Relations: The art of persuasion in effective
speaking; Conducting interviews; Conducting meetings; Participating in group discussions and tutorials;
Non verbal communication clues; Presentation seminars, seeking clarification etc.; Expression of
politeness; Public speaking; Proper listening skills.
• Examination Skills; Preparing for examinations: How much one gets from group discussions; Proper
revision; Understanding examination rubric; Budgeting time during examination process; Writing
examinations and following instructions
Reference Books:
i. B. Bough, 101 ways to improve your communication skills instantly, 4th edition, 2005.
ii. P. Klavs, The hard Truth About soft skills: Work Place Lessons Smart People wish they had learned sooner,
2008.
BIS 1200 Information Systems in Business (3 CU)
Course Description: The course covers the integration of Information and Communication Technologies into
organizations and their working practices, from design and implementation to strategic effects. Drawing on
Information Systems (IS) and Management literature, the course offers a chance for students to examine case studies
of IS successes and failures and to explore ’real-world’ IS management issues.
The course aims to provide students with knowledge for understanding the integration of business and technology
resources to facilitate effective and efficient realization of an organization’s mission and objectives.
Indicative Content: An information systems model: An Information System uses the resources of people,
hardware, software, data, and networks to perform input, processing, output, storage and control activities that
covert data resources into information products; Role of Information Systems in an organization; the shift from data
processing Systems via information Systems to knowledge-Based Systems; How information and knowledge add
value to an organization; Information Systems Trends; the Information Technology component of Information
Systems; Information Systems Engineering. Strategic planning: Organizational strategies and objectives; Human
resource development: budgeting, costing, charging, hire versus buy decisions; Hardware and software procurement:
request for proposal, evaluation, selection,
89

contracting and maintenance; Security in computing: continuity of processes, controls and planning for standby;
Computer audit; Project management: approaches, tools, site planning and installation.
Reference Books:
i. G. Curtis, Business Information Systems: Analysis, Design and Practice, 1995.
ii. P. Bocij, D. Chaffey, A. Greasley, and S. Hickie, Business Information Systems: Technology,
Development and Management for the E-Business, 2005.
BIS 1201: Distributed Information Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of this course, the student will: Understand the basic principles underlying
distributed information systems in general and client-server model (which is viewed as a specialization of distributed
information systems) in particular. Understand the characteristics of common architectures and technical issues for
distributed and client-server information systems. Have the knowledge and skills to design, plan, implement and
support distributed information systems, services and server components.
Indicative Content: This course will cover: a broad foundation in distributed and client-server information systems
from both a managerial and a systems development point of view; provide a base from which the student can
assimilate knowledge of future developments in distributed and client-server information systems. The emphasis
will be on developing skills and techniques in distributed business information systems.
Reference Books:
i. M. T. Ozsu and P. Valduriez, The Principles of Distributed Databases, Pearson Education; 2nd edition,
1999.
ii. G. Coulouris, J. Dollimore and T. Kindberg, Distributed Systems - Concepts and Design, 3rd edition,
Addison Wesley, 2000.
CSC 1200: Programming Methodology (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should be able to: Gain an
understanding of basic programming principles & practice; Recognise simple programming idioms and their
‘semantics’; Select a suitable design methodology for a given problem;
Indicative Content: The course aims at giving a good basis of programming principles and practice. A high-level
programming language such as C will be used to impart a discipline of structured programming. Emphasis will be
put on well-structured and correctly designed Programmes. The course gives an introduction to the basic concepts of
algorithms, Programme structure, data structures and programming. Formal programming languages, syntactic
description; Introduction to digital computing techniques using a high level language; Algorithms development
using the top-down design approach; Use of programming constructs and data structures like arrays, stacks, queues
& heaps; Algorithms specification and verification.
Reference Books:
i. M. Hanssen and H. Richel, Introduction to Programming using SML, Addison-Wesley, 1999.
ii. L. C. Paulson, ML for the Working Programmer, 2nd edition, Cambridge University Press, 1996.
iii. C. Okasaki, Purely Functional Data Structures, Cambridge University Press, 1999.
CSC 1204: Research Methodology (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should be able to: Identify interesting
problems of research and develop appropriate strategies to address the problems identified; Demonstrate ethical
consideration in conduction research; Show knowledge and understanding of Statistical and non-Statistical Research
Methods; Use statistical packages to analyze data and make scientifically sound conclusions based on the analysis;
Interpret, explain, and experiment through writing, oral presentation, various multi-media modes, and in a classroom
setting; and demonstrate reflective, reflexive, creative, interpretative, evaluative, critical, and analytical thinking
skills.
90

Indicative Content: This course is an introduction to research, statistical analysis, and decision making. Close
attention is paid to data types, data contributions, the identification of variables, and descriptive data presentation
techniques. Students are introduced to both parametric and nonparametric data analysis procedures including
independent and dependent sample tests, chi-square analysis, and simple analysis of variance. Hypothesis testing
and the use of statistical software packages are emphasized.
Reference Book:
i. J. M. Ruane, Essentials of Research Methods, Montclair State University, Jul 2004.
BIT 1200: Information Technology (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Understand and use various
computer applications e.g. office suite, email & Internet, image processing for basic tasks; Use computer
applications for advanced tasks like embedded spreadsheets, databases and other media tools used in office
environments; Design and implement simple GUI systems;
Indicative Content: This unit introduces students to the full range of skills needed to operate in the information
society. It will cover an overview of: database management; operating systems management; network services and
electronic mail; document design; data analysis and presentation; information management; information presentation
and the Internet and World Wide Web. Practical will be based on the following software packages: MS office/Open
office, MS outlook/qmail, the netscape /mosaic web browser and miscellaneous multimedia tools. Students will
further use introductory object oriented techniques to design and code systems with graphical user interfaces.
Reference Books:
i. R. Plant and S. Murrell, An Executives Guide to Information Technology: Principles, Business Models, and
Terminology, 2007.
ii. E. Garrison Walters, The Essential Guide to Computing: The Story of Information Technology, Essential
Guide Series, 2000.
BIS 2100: Information Systems Security (4 CU)
Course Description: At the conclusion of the course, the student should have an understanding of: Computer,
databases & network-related security threats and solutions; Principles of authentication and encryption; Internet
Protocol security architecture (IPSEC).
Indicative Content: This course introduces the basic principles of computer security, focusing on system elements.
Among the topics covered are: access control and integrity; Network security; database security; cryptography
(Symmetric and public key systems; PKI Strengths-complexity, secrecy, Encryption Key management);
programming language security (problems like buffer overflow, pointers and arrays; java security).
Reference Books:
i. A. R. Warman, Computer Security within Organizations, The Macmillan Press Ltd, 1993.
ii. P. E. Fites, M. P. Kratz, Information Systems Security: A Practitioners Reference 2nd edition, 2003.
BIT 2100: Information Systems Development (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of this course, students should be able: To gain a general idea about
information systems and the information systems development life cycle; To be familiar with the principles and
approaches of project management as they are applied to the design, development and maintenance of complex
information systems; To understand the roles and responsibilities of information architects in Team-based projects
Indicative Content: This course is an introductory systems design course for software engineers and business
systems analysts. The course presents an overview of information systems and the systems development lifecycle
for the software engineer. Topics include: Information Systems theory, including strategic role of Information
Systems; Systems Development Life Cycle; Project Management principles & techniques; Data Flow Diagrams;
Programme Specifications.
91

Reference Books:
i. A. M. Langer, Analysis and Design of Information Systems, Springer- Verlag, 2007.
ii. S. Brinkkemper, Conceptual, Modelling in Information Systems Engineering, Springer-Verlag, 2007.
BIT 2101: Information Systems Management (3 CU)
Course Description: At the completion of the course, the student should be able: To identify ways to use IT to
leverage business opportunities in different areas of responsibility. Understand the need for organizations to develop
information vision, IT architecture, and strategic and operational IT plans and be able to participate in these
processes. Participate in the development of organizational policies related to the potential impacts of IT usage on
individuals, organizations, and society.
Indicative Content: This Course studies the value of management of information and IT resources to commerce
and industry. It delves on the management and application issues of information systems development rather than
technical concepts. Material covered will include: the foundations of IT management, managing application
portfolio resources, tactical and operational considerations and controlling information resources.
Reference Books:
i. A. M. Langer, Analysis and Design of Information Systems, Springer- Verlag, 2007.
ii. A. Cassidy, A Practical Guide to Information Systems Process Improvement, CRC Press, 2000.
BIT 2102: Electronic Commerce (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should: Understand the main concepts
and processes involved in doing business electronically; Be familiar with the different ways that electronic
commerce can add business value to an organisation; Be able to analyze and design key decisions faced by an
organisation when establishing or updating a web presence for business purposes.
Indicative Content: The course provides an introduction to electronic commerce. It introduces the techniques and
the tools used in on-line transactions. It reviews problems and solutions to business activities being conducted
electronically. Security issues, transaction integrity and electronic payment systems are considered. Topics covered
in this course include: Internet concepts and technology; Data security issues; Electronic payment systems; Internet
marketing and electronic commerce legal issues; Electronic commerce and retailing, and corporate finance; Intranets
and supply chain management, and manufacturing.
Reference Books:
i. H. Chan, J. Wiley and Sons, Electronic Commerce: Fundamentals & Applications, 2001.
ii. D. Travis, E-Commerce Usability: Tools and Techniques to Perfect the On-Line Experience, CRC Press,
2002.
BIS 2102: Knowledge-based Systems (3 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student should be able: To understand important issues,
challenges, concepts and techniques of building and managing knowledge-based Systems. To analyze, design and
develop Programmes and systems that deal with knowledge in various forms.
Indicative Content: This course will cover structuring the logic of a solution into a business or management
problem, designing a knowledge base containing a series of rules and implementing a solution using knowledgebased
software, Methods and tools of problem solving, reasoning, knowledge representation and knowledge
acquisition.
Reference Books:
i. J. V. Richardson, Knowledge-based Systems for General Reference Work: Applications by – Computers,
Academic Press.1995.
ii. G. S. Tuthill, Implementing Knowledge-based Systems, TAB Books Inc, 1991.
92

BIT 2105: Electronic Media Systems and Media (3 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student should; Have an understanding of the various platforms,
applications, media and technology used to develop digital media products and communications. Have an
appreciation of the varied design techniques and software tools used for designing and manipulation of digital media
products. Appreciate and practice the art of combining multimedia authoring tools to provide an effective
multimedia system.
Indicative Content: This course provides a comprehensive overview of the various platforms, applications, media
and technology used to develop digital media products and communications. Participants are introduced to digital
graphics, photography, video, audio, networked multimedia and authoring. Students are taught visual design skills as
a basis for working in graphic design and other major areas of multimedia production, learning a variety of design
techniques using specialist software to design and manipulate images, learn the Art of combining multimedia
authoring tools to provide an effective multimedia system. This course will also investigate the use of several
software tools for multimedia production and the ways in which media components can be represented and
integrated into final multimedia production.
Reference Book:
i. S. Y. Chen, Digital Multimedia Perception and Design, Idea Group Publishing, 2006.
ii. G. Barlas, Distributed Multimedia Retrieval Strategies for Large Scale Networked Systems: Multimedia
Systems and Applications, Springer-Verlag, 2005.
BIS 2200: Intelligent Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: By the completion of this course, the student should; Have an appreciation of computational
issues in problem solving; Have an understanding of concepts, methods and principles in knowledge based problem
solving; Be able to design and implement prototype knowledge systems.
Indicative Content: This unit provides an introduction to intelligent system technologies such as knowledge
engineering, applied artificial intelligence and expert systems as key players in filling a growing niche in corporate
information systems. Topics include: natural language understanding, vision & learning; heuristic programming;
search strategies; knowledge representations, acquisition and Applications i.e. Expert Systems’ design techniques,
programming aspects, applications, successes, limitations and Neural Networks).
Reference Book:
i. M. Negnevitsky, Artificial Intelligence: A Guide to Intelligent Systems, 2nd edition, Addison-Wesley,
2004.
ii. P. Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.
CSC 2202 Systems Analysis and Design (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces established and evolving methodologies for the analysis and design of
an information system. Great emphasis is placed on system characteristics, managing projects, prototyping,
CASE/OOM tools, systems development life cycle phases, the role of the systems analyst, systems selection,
definition of systems requirements, feasibility analysis, system design, and system architecture are topics included.
Upon completion, students should be able to analyze a problem and design an appropriate solution using a
combination of tools and techniques.
Indicative Content:
• SAD Fundamentals: Introduction to IS & types of IS; Need for SAD & role of Analyst; SDLC & use of
CASE tools; Determining feasibility & mgt of SAD activities.
• Information Requirements Analysis Information gathering (Interactive methods, unobtrusive methods,
RAD, prototyping); Determining Systems requirements (types of requirements)
93

• The Analysis Process: Structuring systems requirements (describing process specifications & structured
decisions) Data modelling; Process modelling; Preparing System proposals.
• The Design Process: Designing effective output; Designing effective input (Accurate Data entry
Procedures); User Interface design; Database Design.
• System Implementation: Quality Assurance through Software Engineering (design with structured charts,
testing, maintenance, auditing, Quality mgt); Implementing Information Systems (user training, conversion
strategies, systems evaluation.
• Project Management: Stages of system Development; Project planning; Estimation & Project Monitoring &
Control.
• Introduction to Object-oriented Systems Analysis & Design using UML
Reference Books:
i. Kendall & Kendall, Systems Analysis and Design, 6th edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005.
ii. A. J. Hoffer, F. J. George and J. S. Valacich, Modern Systems Analysis and Design, 2nd edition, Addison-
Wesley, 1999.
CSC 2203: Database Languages (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of this course, the student should: Have knowledge of database definition
and manipulation languages; Be able to use SQL, Advanced SQL, QBE, Visual Basic to perform data search,
storage and other data processing techniques on a relational database schema.
Indicative Content: The course will give in-depth knowledge about the commonly used database manipulation
languages. Based on a relational database schema, the course will illustrate the use of these languages in
manipulating databases. Topics include: a brief introduction to relational database schemas; Database languages
(SQL, Advanced SQL, Query-By-Example (QBE), Visual Basic.
Reference Book:
i. C. Coronel, Database Systems: Design, Implementation and Management, 6th edition, Course
Technology, 2004.
ii. R. Ramakrishnan and J. Gehrke, Database Management Systems, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 3rd
edition, 2002.
CSC 2204: Research Design and Implementation (2 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student should have an understanding of the
basic guidelines on how to carry out research and produce a good academic project report.
Indicative Content: This unit will cover: Developing the proposal; approval of the study plan; conducting the
study; writing the manuscript; defense (presentation) of the Thesis (report).
Reference Books:
i. J. W. Creswell, Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches, SAGE
Publications Inc.; 3rd edition, 2008.
BIS 2201: Executive Information Systems (EIS) (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student should be able to: Understand the information
requirements of executives; understand how executives make use of information; Understand the merits and
limitations of available EIS software;
Indicative Content: The course will cover a framework for the understanding of the information needs of the
executives, development and implementation of appropriate information models.
94

Reference Books:
i. A. Cassidy, A Practical Guide to Information Systems Process Improvement, CRC Press, 2000.
BIS 2202: Selected Topics in Information Systems (4 CU)
Course Description:
By the end of this course, the student should have an understanding of the current developments in information
systems theory, research and practice.
Indicative Content: Topics of current interest in Information Systems will be discussed.
CSC 2200: Operating Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: Operating Systems course introduces students to software that controls hardware and makes
the hardware usable. Its interaction with other computer devises and how it controls other computer processes is
explored. The Course aims at providing students with a detailed understanding of how operating systems work;
skills to write basic Programmes to utilize underlying operating system infrastructures. At the end of the course,
students are able to know the dominant categories of operating systems are Windows and UNIX (Linux, Mac OS,
Solaris, etc). Students of operating systems are expected to have a proper understanding of the differences between
these two. Students should be able to understand different design principles for operating systems and various
software tools that make operating systems usable.
Indicative Content; Operating Systems Structures; Processes and threads; Thread creation, manipulation and
synchronization; Deadlock; Implementing Synchronization operations; CPU scheduling; Memory management;
File systems and file system implementation; Monitors; Segments; Disk Scheduling; Networking; UDP and TCP.
Reference Book:
i. W. Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 5th edition, Prentice Hall, 2005.
BIS 3100: Modeling and Simulation (4 CU)
Course Description: The course gives students theoretical and practical skills in modelling and simulation of
dynamic systems with a view of learning their behaviour and the sensitivity of that behaviour to certain parameters.
The course will familiarize students with modelling and simulation techniques that are applicable under varying
circumstances equip students with practical experiences of composing models and running simulations under
varying circumstances, equip students with skills of correctly representing simulation results
Indicative Content: Simulation of operational systems, Simulation as a decision making methodology, Model
development and validation, Design of simulation experiments, Generation of appropriate values of random
variables, Interactive procedures and interpretation of results.
Reference Books:
i. L. Oakshott, Business Modelling and Simulation, Trans- Atlantic Publications, 1997.
ii. R. G. Coyle, System Dynamics Modelling; A practical approach, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 1996.
BSE 3103: Requirements Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course students should be able to: Understand the principles, tools, and
techniques for requirements elicitation, specification, and analysis; demonstrate the role of requirements in system
development and maintenance; and appreciate the difficulties of specifying requirements for real systems, as well as
effective methods tools and techniques.
Indicative Content: System and Software System Engineering; Software Requirements Concepts; Requirements
Elicitation; Software Requirements Analysis, Software Requirements Specifications, Software Requirements Tools,
Software Requirements Verification; Software Requirements Engineering Management; Developing a Successful
Software Requirement.
95

Reference Books:
i. P. Loucopoulos and V. Karakostas, System Requirements Engineering, McGraw-Hill; 1995
ii. D. Leffingwell, D. Widrig, A. Wesley Managing Software Requirements, A Use Case Approach, 2nd
edition,: Boston, 2000.
iii. L. Chung, B. Nixon, E. Yu and J. Mylopoulos, Non-Functional Requirements in Software Engineering,
Kluwer Academic Publishing, 2000.
iv. A. M. Davis, Software Requirements: Objects, Functions, & States, Prentice Hall: Englewood Cliffs, 1993.
v. R. H. Thayer and M. Dortman, System and Software Requirements Engineering: Tutorial, Editors, IEEE
Computer Society Press, 1997.
BIS 3102 Human Computer Interaction (3 CU)
Course Description: This course covers: Introduction to the interdisciplinary area of Human Computer Interaction
(HCI); the underlying principles of psychology, computer science and ergonomics that influence theory and practice
of HCI design and usage; specific topics will include: models of human information processing, organizational
structures and socio-technical approaches to information system design; design principles for dialogue management;
issues of systems user-ability; hypertext; natural language processing; virtual reality and multimedia applications.
The course aims to provide students with knowledge and skills in human factors with respect to interactive software,
characteristics of design processes, principles and guidelines of interface design, virtual environments with respect
to interfaces, corporate and business aspects of human computer interaction, interface aspects of response times and
presentation, interaction devices.
Indicative Content: Conceptual systems models; Interface design and evaluation; Systems engineering and systems
design factors; Assessments; Software tools; Virtual environments; Menus and dialogues; Command and natural
languages; Interface devices; Response times; Complexity; Information attributes; Human factors and attributes;
Tasks; Cognitive modelling; Function mapping; Hypermedia; Societal considerations and ethics and Internet/web
considerations
Reference Books:
i. A. Dix, J. Finlay, G. Abowd and R. Beale, Human Computer Interaction, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
ii. A. Sears and J. A. Jacko, the Human – Computer Interaction Handbook, 2008.
iii. H. Sharp, Y. Rodgers, J. Preece and J. Wiley & Sons, Interaction Design: beyond Human Computer
Interaction, 2nd edition, 2007.
CSC 3107: Database Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: At the conclusion of this course, the student should be able to: Understand the principles of
database design and implementation; Perform conceptual data modeling using entity-relationship modeling
techniques and implement developed models in a relational database management system; Appreciate database
handling and manipulation techniques in dynamic computing environments.
Indicative Content: The course covers the principles of database design and implementation including relational
theory, database development, conceptual and logical modeling, use of SQL as a data-definition and data
manipulation language, and contemporary issues in database administration. Practical experience in entityrelationship
modeling, database design, and query writing will be covered. The course will also cover using
transactions, implementing cursors, stored procedures and triggers. The course will also provide an introduction to
database connectivity standards (for example, JDBC), client-server databases (for example, ORACLE), objectoriented
databases, and accessing databases through the World-Wide Web.
96

Reference Books:
i. J. Petersen, Absolute Beginner‘s Guide to Databases, Absolute Beginners Guide, Que, 2002.
ii. H. G. Molina, J. D. Ullman, J. D. Widom, Database Systems: The Complete Book (GOAL Series) Prentice
Hall, 2001.
CSC 2108: Software Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces students to the foundations of software engineering as a discipline.
Students are introduced to the evolving role of software engineering, especially with emphasis on software
engineering process and process models. Key topics covered include Software configuration management,
Requirement analysis, Software Specification, Design methods, Software testing, Software project management
techniques; Software project planning, Risk management; Software Quality Assurance; Software reuse; and
Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
Indicative Content:
• Evolving role of software, software characteristics; Systems and environment; system engineering
hierarchy, information and knowledge engineering; Information strategy; Business Area analysis, modeling
enterprise and business-level data modeling, system architecture and associated information flow; writing
system specification.
• Software Engineering as a layered technology: Software process, software process models. Software
configuration management: the SCM process, Identification of objects in software configuration, version
control, change control, configuration audit, SCM standards.
• Requirement analysis: Communication techniques, Information gathering tools; organizing and structuring
information; analysis principles; Analysis modeling.
• Software Specification: Design process, principles and concepts: Abstraction, refinement, modularity,
control hierarchy, structural partitioning, information hiding, functional independence, cohesion, coupling,
design heuristics;
• Design methods: data design, architectural design, transform mapping, design optimization, human
computer interface design, procedural design and tools; Design documentation.
• Software testing: Testing objectives, Testing principles, Testability, test case designing, white box testing;
Basis path testing: Condition testing, data flow testing, loop testing; Black box testing: graph based testing
methods, equivalence partitioning, Boundary value analysis, comparison testing; Testing documentation
and help facilities; Software testing strategy: unit testing, integration testing, validation testing, system
testing.
• Software project management techniques: project metrics, software measurement and metrics, software
quality metrics;
• Software project planning: objectives of planning, resources, project estimation and estimation models,
project decomposition techniques, make-buy decisions; automated estimation tools.
• Risk management: software risks, risk identification, risk projection, risk mitigation, monitoring and
management; Project Scheduling: people and effort relationships, defining tasks, defining task network,
scheduling techniques; Software teams and intra-team relationships; role of project manager.
• Software Quality Assurance: Concept of quality, quality control vs. quality assurance, cost of quality,
factors that affect quality, quantitative view of quality, quality metrics, defect removal efficiency SQA
activities, ISO standards and CMM practices, SEI levels, Software reviews, Formal approaches to SQA,
Statistical Quality Assurance. Software reliability, reliability metrics, reliability models, meeting reliability
requirements.
• Effective metrics for software process: Measurement principles, attributes of software metrics, metrics for
analysis model, metrics for design model, metrics for source code, metrics for maintenance.
97

• Software reuse: difficulties in reuse, hardware reuse vs. software reuse, reusable artifacts, domain
engineering approach, analysis design and construction of reusable components, classification and retrieval
of components, economic impact of reuse and reuse metrics.
• Computer aided software engineering: CASE tools and application.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Peters, W. Pedrycz, Software engineering: An Engineering approach, John Wiley, 2000.
ii. R. S. Pressman, Software engineering: A Practitioners Approach, 5th edition, McGraw Hill, 2005.
iii. I. Sommerville, Software Engineering, 8th edition, Addison Wesley, 2008.
iv. D. Ghezzi, M. Jazayeri, D. Mandrioli, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
CSC 3103: User Interface Design (4 CU)
Course Description: The course introduces the principles of user interface development, focusing on design,
implementation and evaluation. The course aims at providing different skills to students, such as: Developing
efficient, flexible and interactive User Interfaces (UI); Provide ability to identifying system users, the tasks they
want to carry out and the environment in which they will be working; Creating a conceptual designs; Designing
various kinds of UI, in particular graphical user interfaces (GUIs) and websites; evaluating UIs; Appreciation of
realities of developing usable UIs in an organization.
Indicative Content: Usability; User-Centred Design; UI Software Architecture; Human Capabilities; Output
Models; Conceptual Models and Metaphors; Input Models; Design Principles; Paper Prototyping; Constraints and
Layouts; Graphic Design; Computer Prototyping; Heuristic Evaluation; User Testing; Experiment Design and
Experiment Analysis.
Reference Books:
i. D. A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things, New York, NY: Doubleday, 1990.
ii. J. Nielsen, Usability Engineering, Burlington, MA, Academic Press, 1994.
iii. K. Mullet and D. Sano, Designing Visual Interfaces: Communication oriented techniques. Prentice Hall,
1994.
BIS 3200: Project in Information Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: The objective of this course is to give the student experience in developing independent skills
and implementing non-trivial programming/ research projects.
Indicative Content: Each student will pursue a lengthy programming project in any area of computer information
systems. The project will be specified, designed and implemented, with one of the Professors Lecturers as an
adviser/ supervisor.
BIS 3201: Strategic Management of Information Systems (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of this course, the student will have an understanding of the: Information
needs of an organization and the role of information systems in providing them; Alternative ways to match the
information systems function to the structure and behavior of the organization; The role of the CIO and other
executives in managing an organization’s IS f unction;
Indicative Content: This course will adopt an enterprise management perspective with the aim to develop an
understanding of managerial and organizational performance and of strategic decision making, in a competitive
business environment. It will cover conceptual and practical skills in integrating information systems into financial,
organisational, marketing and production/service function of an organisation with an overall business strategy. Other
topics include cross-cultural management, the management of high technology, managing the physical environment,
and public sector management.
98

Reference Books:
i. W. Robson, Strategic Management and Information Systems: An Integrated Approach, Financial Times/
Prentice Hall, 2nd edition, 1997.
ii. S. Clarke, Information Systems Strategic Management: Rout ledge Series in Information Systems: An
Integrated Approach, Rout ledge; 1st edition, 2006.
CSC 3209: Computer Networks (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student should have; A general understanding of the important
concepts in data networks; Knowledge of the problems which occur at various levels of a layered communication’s
model and how these problems can be solved; Be introduced to network programming using the socket paradigm.
Indicative Content: This course gives an introduction and an overview of the important concepts in data networks.
Topics include: Introduction to data networks, problems which occur at various levels of a layered communications
model, and how these problems can be solved. In particular, the course emphasizes the levels up to and including the
transport layer, and how one can implement applications based on the services provided by the transport layer. An
Important part of the course is network programming using the socket paradigm (Internet addressing, UDP, TCP,
HTTP).
Reference Books:
i. S. Karris, Networks: Design and Management, Orchard Publications, 2008.
ii. F. M. Nader, Computer and Communication Networks, Prentice Hall, 2006.
BIS 3202: E-Governance (4 CU)
Course Description: By completion of this course, the student should have an understanding of: The difference
between e-governance and e-government; E-governance strategy and Public Policy issues for e-governance
implementation; Infrastructure and applications required for e-governance.
Indicative Content: The course will cover: the definitions of e-governance and e-government; e-governance
(Strategy and Implementation);Public Policy for e-governance ( legal, ethical and other public issues, privacy,
Intellectual property rights, Free speech, Consumer and seller protection);Infrastructure for e-governance (intranet,
extranet, IP, web-based-client server, Internet security) and e-governance applications (online citizen access to
governmental databases, e-procurement, e-licensing & e-democracy).
Reference Books:
i. G. D. Garson, Digital Government: Principles and Best Practices, IGI Publishing; illustrated edition, 2003.
ii. D. M. West, Digital Government: Technology and Public Sector Performance, Princeton University Press;
illustrated edition, 2007.
BIT 3204 Enterprise Network Management (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student should: Have an understanding of what enterprise
network management entails and how different it is from other network management techniques; Have an
understanding of the various methods and tools used in implementing enterprise network management;
Indicative Content: This course will cover the introduction to enterprise network management; the Internet and
ISO models, SNMP,ASN.I; structure of management information and MIB; Events and managed objects; EMS Vs
NMS.NOC; remote and web-based management tools; OAM & P focus: operation, maintenance, performance
monitoring and introduction of traffic engineering and load balancing.
Reference Books:
i. P. Oppenheimer, Top-Down Network Design, Cisco Press, 2nd edition, 2004.
ii. A. Clemm, Network Management Fundamentals, Cisco Press, 1st edition, 2006.
99

BIT 3205 Database (DB) Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, the student will: Understand the use of SQLPlus and the SQL
language with a fourth generation general purpose language to generate scripts, reports and database objects; Be able
to write server side stored procedures and triggers; Apply the material in group database design and implementation
of projects
Indicative Content: In this course, students will design, critique and develop database applications using SQL with
fourth generation languages and SQL embedded in third generation languages such as C. Topics include: modular
design and development, module development, and compiling and linking. They also include use of triggers,
embedded procedures, dynamic SQL preparation, and database cursors. Finally, exception and error handling and
development with in a local and distributed application environment will be discussed.
Reference Books:
i. G. Reese, Database Programming with JDBC and Java, O’Reilly Media, Inc.; 2nd edition, 2000.
ii. M. Fisher, JDBC API Tutorial and Reference, Prentice Hall; 3rd edition, 2003.
100

9.0 DEPARTMENT OF NETWORKS
9.1 Introduction
Traditional (isolated) IT solutions like desktop computing may have served us well in the past. But the growing
need for ubiquitous computing in the 21st Century means these solutions can no longer meet the demands of the
business communities. Today, users of computing technologies desire new ways of information access, and are
demanding new computing models with secure access of services. To meet the emerging computing needs of the
business and research communities, we think part of the answer lies in the well engineered data communication
networks and software solutions. Well engineered solutions, full of scientific insights allow for more dynamic,
flexible and cheaper solutions with limited malfunctions.
With the growing demand of networked systems, the Department of Networks Faculty of Computing and IT,
Makerere University has positioned herself as a number one centre in the region on data communication and
software engineering teaching, research and consultancy. The department is internationally recognized for its work
in the building IT human resource capacity in both the public and private sectors especially in universities. The
department has trained thousands of professionals with theoretical and practical skills in the area of Data
Communications Engineering, Network Administration, Mobile Computing, System Administration and Software
Engineering. The team in the department continues to challenge itself for higher distinctions.
The quest for better solutions to real problems has encouraged researchers in the department to establish strong
partnerships with other institutions, private or public in the areas of Data Communication Networks, Mobile
Computing, Digital security, Software Engineering and related disciplines. The collaborations of the department has
established and aims at establishing focuses on human capacity building, optimal adaption of technology, research
and development of new technologies.
As a department, we are gratefully for the contribution made by our partners which include; NUFFIC, Nokia Inc.,
HP Inc., Uganda Police Force, Cisco Systems Inc., Google, MTN Uganda, New Vision Group and Rockefeller
Foundation.
9.2 Bachelor of Science in Software Engineering Degree (BSc SE) Programme
9.2.1 Overview
This programme offers a course of study leading to the B.Sc. in Software Engineering. The Bachelor of Science in
Software Engineering Degree Programme will be offered to give an opportunity to prospective students to undertake
training in Software engineering at a bachelor’s degree level within Uganda. With the growth of the ICT sector in
Uganda, there is need to produce graduates who are job creators using the skills obtained in software Engineering.
The objectives of the programme are;
a) To produce graduates who are well-educated in the fundamental concepts of software engineering and able
to continue their professional development throughout their careers. The course combines theory with
consideration of its application in software engineering practice.
b) To build human resource capacity in the Software engineering discipline in both the public and private
sectors to students who wish to become proficient in developing software in a variety of languages,
platforms and applications using a methodical approach.
c) To produce graduates with good communication skills capable of functioning responsibly in diverse
environments and able to work in teams.
101
Dr. Benjamin Kanagwa
Head of Department

d) To produce graduates who are innovative and are capable of creating jobs;
1. Target Group
The revised programme targets three categories of people, namely Direct Entry, Diploma Holders and Mature Entry
Scheme in relevant programmes.
2. Minimum Admission Requirements
Admission to the B.Sc. in Software Engineering (BSc.SE) degree course will be through three avenues; Direct Entry,
Mature age and Diploma entry schemes. To be admitted for a course leading to an award of Bachelor of Science in
Software Engineering (BSc.SE) Degree, a candidate must satisfy the general admission requirements for Makerere
University. In addition, the following regulations shall hold:
a) Direct Entry
Candidates seeking admission through this avenue must have obtained:
i. At least two principal passes at the same sitting in Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education (UACE)
of which one of them must be in either Mathematics or Physics.
ii. A minimum weighted points set by the Admissions Board.
iii. For purposes of computing weighted points, the A- level subjects shall be grouped and weighted as follows:
Group Weight Subjects
Essential 3 Any two best done subjects among: Mathematics, Physics,
Economics, Chemistry, Biology, Geography, Literature,
Entrepreneurship, Technical Drawing and Fine Art
Relevant 2 Any other best done subject of all A’ level subjects
Desirable 1 General Paper, Sub-Mathematics
Others 0.5 All others.
b) Mature Entry Scheme
For admission under Mature Entry Scheme, a candidate must have passed a Makerere University Mature Age
Entry Examinations.
c) Diploma Holders
Applicants should possess at least a second class (lower division) Diploma in Computer Science, Engineering,
Statistics or any other diploma with either Mathematics or Computer Science as one of the subjects from any
recognized institution.
3. Nature of the Programme
The day programme has both government and privately sponsored students. The evening programme has privately
sponsored students only.
4. Duration
The duration of the programme shall be three (4) academic years consisting of eight semesters and two recess terms.
Each semester lasts for seventeen (17) weeks and two (2) weeks of which are for examinations.
5. Tuition Fees
Tuition fees for privately sponsored students shall be 2,600,000 Uganda Shillings per year for Ugandans and
5,050,000 Uganda Shillings per year for non Ugandans. This is the same tuition fees for the existing curriculum.
6. Semester Load and Minimum Graduation Load
102

The normal semester load is between 15 and 21 credit units. The minimum graduation load is 167 credit units
for courses passed including all the compulsory courses and required number of electives within a period
stipulated by the University.
9.2.2 Programme Structure
Details of the Programme structure as specified below where CU, LH, PH, TH, and CH represent Credit Units,
Lecture Hours, Practical Hours, Tutorial Hours and Contact Hours respectively.
Code Course Title CU LH TH PH CH
Semester 1
CSK 1101 Communication Skills 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 1100 Computer Literacy 4 45 -- 30 60
BIT 1102 Communication Technology and Internet 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 1103 Systems Analysis and Design 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 1104 Discrete Mathematics 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 1105 Business Law 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 2
BSE 1200 Software Development Principles I 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 1202 Principles of Programming I 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 1201 Numerical Analysis 3 30 30 -- 45
CSC 1203 Information Systems 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 1205 Introduction to Internet Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 1204 Research Methodology 3 30 30 -- 45
Year 1: Recess Term:
BSE 1301 Professional Software Engineering Mini Practical Project I 4 -- -- 120 60
Semester 3:
BSE 2101 Introduction to Database Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2102 Software Development Principles II 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2103 Principles of Programming II 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 2100 Data Structures and Algorithms 4 45 -- 30 45
BSE 2104 Computer Architecture 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 2105 Formal Methods 3 30 30 -- 45
Electives: (No Elective Course)
Semester 4
BSE 2200 System Software 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2201 Network Application Development 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2202 Embedded Systems Software 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2203 Computer Networks and Data communication 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 2204 Modeling in Information Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
Electives: (No Elective Course)
Year 2: Recess Term:
BSE 2301 Professional Software Engineering Mini Practical Project II 4 -- -- 120 60
Semester 5
BSE 3101 IT Projects Management and Development 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3102 Object-Oriented Software Engineering 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3103 Requirements Engineering 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 3100 Database Management Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
103

BSE 3104 Software Metrics 3 30 -- 30 45
Electives: (At least 1 Elective Course)
BSE 3105 Software Evolution 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3106 Mobile Networks and Computing 4 45 30 -- 60
BSE 3107 Real-Time and Embedded Systems 4 45 -- 30 60
Semester 6
BSE 3201 Software Architecture 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3202 Distributed Systems Development 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3203 Object-Oriented Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3204 Human-Computer Interface Design 4 45 -- 30 60
Electives: (At least 1 Elective Course)
BSE 3205 Unix Shell Programming 4 45 -- 30 60
CSC 3202 Concepts of CAD/CAM 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 3206 Computer Graphics 4 45 -- 30 60
Year 3: Recess Term:
BSE 3301 Internship 4 -- -- 120 60
Semester 7
BSE 4100 Software Engineering Project I 5 -- -- 150 75
BSE 4101 Software Reliability and Testing 4 45 -- 30 60
BSE 4102 Ethics for Professional Engineers 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 4103 Entrepreneurship and Business 3 30 30 -- 45
Semester 8:
BSE 4200 Software Engineering Project II 5 -- -- 150 75
BSE 4201 Software Design Patterns 4 45 30 -- 60
BSE 4203 Information Technology and Society 3 30 30 -- 45
BSE 4204 Emerging trends in software engineering 3 30 30 -- 45
9.2.3 Course Unit Description
CSK 1101: Communication Skills (3 CU)
Course Description: This course provides students with skills of effective communication. These include verbal,
written, and gesture. The course aims at facilitating students appropriately and clearly communicate with others. The
aims of the course unit are to: Improve the communication competencies of the student; Improve problem solving
strategies of students; improve the art of critical thinking within the student; improve the student’s ability to collect
and synthesize information; provide students with knowledge to utilize the library and other educational resources.
Indicative Content:
• Writing Skills: Thinking critically/selectively before the writing process; selecting the relevant details;
organising the relevant details logically; writing the reports essays, letters and taking notes in appropriate
register; avoiding ambiguities, fallacies, irrationalities; providing supportive evidence; editing documents,
proof reading; writing and expanding information; Quoting and citing references; writing a curriculum
vitae.
• Reading Skills: The use of skimming; scanning inference and prediction in reading; Intensive and critical
reading; Acquisition of specific reading skills; Interpretation of non linear texts; Locating information and
comprehension.
• Speaking and Listening Skills to Enhance Effective Public Relations: The art of persuasion in effective
speaking; Conducting interviews; Conducting meetings; Participating in group discussions and tutorials;
104

Non verbal communication clues; Presentation seminars, seeking clarification etc.; Expression of
politeness; Public speaking; Proper listening skills.
• Examination Skills; Preparing for examinations: How much one gets from group discussions; Proper
revision; Understanding examination rubric; Budgeting time during examination process; Writing
examinations and following instructions
Reference Books:
i. B. Bough, 101 ways to improve your communication skills instantly, 4th edition, 2005.
ii. P. Klavs, The hard Truth About soft skills: Work Place Lessons Smart People wish they had learned sooner,
2008.
CSC 1100: Computer Literacy (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students are to learn about the basic organization, concepts and terminologies in
a computerized environment. They are also to get an in depth understanding of common computer applications. The
use of related applications in different operating systems will be explored. The aims of the course unit are to: Equip
students with basic knowledge about computer organization; Equip students with skills of using common office
applications; Expose students to different operating systems; Equip students with skills of how to use the Internet;
and equip students with knowledge about common text editors in different operating systems. On completion of this
course unit, the students will be able to: Describe the different parts of a computer; describe the historical evolution
of computers; competently use the common office applications in at least two operating systems and competently
use common text editor in at least two operating systems.
Indicative Content: General computer organisation; Historical perspectives of computing; common Microsoft
office packages; office packages in other operating systems; text editors; Common Linux and Using the web.
Reference Books:
i. J. Preston, R. Ferret and S. Gaskin, Computer Literacy, 2007.
ii. J. Janrich and D. Oja, Practical Computer Literacy, 2001.
BIT 1102 Communications Technology & Internet (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is intended to be at the introductory level in a curriculum and to provide
foundation skills for subsequent network-related courses, for example, Internet Programming. It provides an
overview of Communications Technology and Internet. The goal is to help students understand the role and meaning
of Communications Technology and Internet in the contemporary world. The course aims to: Give students main
guidelines for the future study of networks-related courses; Develop their knowledge and understanding of core
networking concepts and technologies; Internet and intranet tools; basics of networking protocols; basics of network
security; core Internet infrastructure; personal, business, social, legal and ethical implications of Internet governance
Indicative Content: Networking Concepts; Internet and Intranet Tools; Protocols; Security; Internet; Infrastructure
and Governance – Personal, Business, Social, Legal and Ethical; Implications
Reference Books:
i. D. E. Comer, The Internet Book, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
ii. D. Amor, Internet Future Strategies: How Pervasive Computing Services Will Change the World, Prentice
Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2002.
iii. I. Zeid, Mastering the Internet and HTML, Prentice Hall Inc., Upper Saddle River, 2000.
iv. Internet Getting Started, Editions ENI, Nantes, 2001.
v. A. E. Grant, J. H, Meadows, Communication Technology Update and Fundamentals, Focal Press, 2008.
vi. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, The New Communications Technologies, 5th edition: Applications, Policy,
and Impact, Focal Press, 2004.
105

vii. M. Mirabito, B. Morgenstern, Communication Technology and Social Change: Theory and Implications
Lea's Communication Series, Lawrence Erlbaum, 2006.
BSE 1103: System Analysis and Design (3 CU)
Course Description: This course introduces established and evolving methodologies for the analysis and design of
an information system. Great emphasis is placed on system characteristics, managing projects, prototyping,
CASE/OOM tools, systems development life cycle phases, the role of the systems analyst, systems selection,
definition of systems requirements, feasibility analysis, system design, and system architecture are topics included.
Upon completion, students should be able to analyze a problem and design an appropriate solution using a
combination of tools and techniques.
Indicative Content:
• SAD Fundamentals: Introduction to IS & types of IS; Need for SAD & role of Analyst; SDLC & use of
CASE tools; Determining feasibility & mgt of SAD activities.
• Information Requirements Analysis Information gathering (Interactive methods, unobtrusive methods,
RAD, prototyping); Determining Systems requirements (types of requirements)
• The Analysis Process: Structuring systems requirements (describing process specifications & structured
decisions) Data modelling; Process modelling; Preparing System proposals.
• The Design Process: Designing effective output; Designing effective input (Accurate Data entry
Procedures); User Interface design; Database Design.
• System Implementation: Quality Assurance through Software Engineering (design with structured charts,
testing, maintenance, auditing, Quality mgt); Implementing Information Systems (user training, conversion
strategies, systems evaluation
• Project Management: Stages of system Development; Project planning; Estimation & Project Monitoring &
Control
• Introduction to Object-oriented Systems Analysis & Design using UML
Reference Books:
i. Kendall & Kendall, Systems Analysis and Design, 6th edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005.
ii. J. A. Hoffer, J. F. George and J. S. Valacich , Modern Systems Analysis and Design, 2nd edition, Addison-
Wesley, 1999.
BSE 1104: Discrete Mathematics (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Be familiar with the terminology,
operations, and symbols of set theory, and with formal logic; Be able to use logic to determine the validity of an
argument; Be able to construct the proof of a theorem directly, by the contra positive, by cases, by contradiction, by
truth table, by counter-example, and by mathematical induction; Be able to identify a relation; specifically, a partial
order, equivalence relation, or total order; Be able to identify a function; specifically, subjective, injective, and
objective functions; Be able to perform operations on matrices; Be familiar with the terminology for graphs and
trees; Be able to trace Euler and Hamiltonian paths; Be able to construct minimal spanning trees and adjacency
matrices for graphs; Have begun to develop a logical mode of thought that will be applicable to computer design,
both hardware and software.; Be able to understand sequential logic; Be able to understand sets and relations and be
able to represent information using zeros and ones.
Indicative Content: Set algebra, logic, relations and functions, recursion, matrices; graph theory, and methods of
proof. Emphasis is on an algorithmic approach; Set theory; Methods of proof; Recursion; Matrix algebra; Graphs
and trees. Application to data structure and graph representations, partial ordered sets, trees, algebraic structures,
lattices and Boolean algebra, semi groups, groups, introduction to grammars and machines and languages, error
correcting codes; Representation of information two’s complement arithmetic. Combinational logic: switching
106

algebra, canonical forms, Karnaugh maps, combinational network analysis and design, MSI modules. Sequential
logic: latch, flip-flop and logic design, state diagram, sequential network analysis and synthesis, register, counter,
memory organization.
Reference Books:
i. L.S. Bobrow, and M. A. Arbib, Discrete Mathematics: Applied Algebra for Computer and Information
Science, Philadelphia, PA: Saunders, 1974.
ii. J. A, Dossey, A, D, Otto, L. Spence, and C. V. Eynden, Discrete Mathematics, 3rd edition. Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley, 1997.
iii. K. Balakrishnan, Introductory Discrete Mathematics, New York: Dover, 1997.
BSE 1105: Business Law (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Understand the basic nature of the
legal system including the court structure and the role of lawyers; Understand the different types of torts and crimes;
Be familiar with contract law including all the elements of a contract under the common law as well as the Uniform
Commercial Code; Understand the basic theories of products liability law; Be familiar with the creation of security
interests and the rules that secured creditors must follow; Understand the basic features of bankruptcy law;
Understand the general nature of an agency relationship
Indicative Content: This subject acquaints the student with legal concepts and their application to business and
personal situations. Attention is paid to problems arising under the following topical headings: basic nature of the
legal system; tort law; contract law, including both common law principles and the provisions of the Uniform
Commercial Code; products liability law; debtor/creditor relations; bankruptcy law; and agency law. Introduction to
Legal System; Tort and Criminal law; Contract Law; Uniform Commercial Code; Products Liability Law; Secured
Transactions; Bankruptcy; Agency.
Reference Books:
i. Ibp Usa and Emerging Markets Investment Center, Uganda Business Law Handbook, International
Business Publications, USA; 2nd edition, 1999.
BSE 1200: Principles of Software Development I (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion, the student should be able to: Demonstrate mastery of the
software development process, describing core activities at various levels of software development; Perform
requirement analysis of a simple software systems; Manage a team of developers; Demonstrate knowledge of at
least one tool of software documentation; Work in a team; and design, develop, test and valid a software product.
Indicative Content: Introduction: What is software engineering? Phases in the development of software; Software
Management: Planning and controlling a software development project. Requirements analysis: Requirements
specification, humans as information sources, tools for documenting the requirements (SADT, PSL/PSA, Ada-based
analysis methods). Software design: Abstraction, modularity, information hiding, design methods, design
documentation; Testing: Test objectives, verification and validation, manual test techniques, techniques for
functional and structural testing.
Reference Books:
i. B. Boehm and R. Turner, Balancing Agility and Discipline: A Guide for the Perplexed, Addison Wesley
Professional, 2003.
ii. A. M. Davis, 201 Principles of Software Development, McGraw-Hill, March, 1995.
BSE 1201: Numerical Analysis (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to: Demonstrate factual knowledge
including the mathematical notation and terminology used in the course; Describe the fundamental principles
including the laws and theorems arising from the concepts covered in this course; Apply course material along with
107

techniques and procedures covered in this course to solve practical problems; and write numerical Programmes,
such as Mat lab Programmes, to solve the above problems.
Indicative Content: Numerical linear algebra, numerical solution of systems of non-linear equations,
approximations, Fast Fourier-Transformation, numerical integration, deference equations and numerical solution of
ordinary differential equations. Problem solving is an important part of the course.
Reference Book:
i. R. L. Burden, and D. J, Faires, Numerical Analysis, Brooks/Cole Publishing Co., Pacific Grove, CA, 8th
edition, 2001.
BSE 1202: Principles of Programming I (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to: Demonstrate mastery of basic
programming concepts, like Programme structure and control, Application Programme Interface (API), memory
management among others; Demonstrate sufficient understanding of Java as a programming language; Develop
simple web and stand alone applications in Java; Work with an Integrate Development Kit like NETBEANS with
minimal difficulties; and differentiate the various programming languages (i.e., in terms of their strength and
weakness).
Indicative Content: An introduction to the Java programming language. The course will include an introduction to
the concepts of object oriented programming and will show how Java supports this programming paradigm.
Students will learn about the Java environment and will write both applets (programs that execute in a Web browser)
and applications (stand alone Programme). In addition to learning about basic language statements, students will
also learn how Java provides support for such diverse applications as Web pages, multimedia, educational, etc
Reference Books:
i. R. W. Sebesta, Concepts of Programming Languages, 5th edition, Addison Wesley, 2002.
ii. R. Sethi, Progamming Languages: Concepts and Constructs, 2nd edition. Addison Wesley, 1996.
iii. Y. D. Liang, Introduction to Java Programming: Comprehensive Version, Prentice Hall, 2006.
BSE 1204: Introduction to Internet Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: On successfully completing this course, students will be able to: Set up a Net development
including environment, including MSDE; Apply core ASP.NET technologies to develop Web applications; Author
server-side ASP.NET code in C#; Create Web applications are using ADO.NET to interact with SQL Server; and (v)
Write ASP.NET pages that integrate into traditional DHTML-driven pages.
Indicative Content: ASP.NET development fundamentals, providing hands-on experience through the building of
a fully functional time and expense tracking application like TimeEx. Starting with an overview of server-side
technologies, it then goes into the C# (C Sharp) programming language commonly used for ASP.NET and database
development utilizing MSDE (Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine). Particular attention is given to techniques for
integrating ASP.NET pages with the advanced client-side (DHTML) technologies covered first.
Reference Books:
ii. Z. Ruvalcaba, Build Your Own ASP.NET Website Using C# &VB.NET, 1st edition.
iii. P. J. Deite and H. M. Deitel, Internet & World Wide Web: How to Programme, Prentice Hall; 4th edition,
2007.
iv. S. Walther, ASP.NET Unleashed, Sams Publishing, 2003.
v. K. Kalata, Internet Programming with VBScript and JavaScript (Web warrior series), Course Technology,
1st edition, 2000.
108

CSC 1203: Information Systems (3 CU)
Course Description: On completion of this course, the students should have achieved the following: An
understanding of characteristics of information systems and their management; Technology and its effective
utilization within organizations; Skills in evaluating and applying appropriate methods and technologies for
representing, managing and disseminating information; and Skills in contributing to information system
implementation using sound principles, an appreciation of the necessary legal, ethical and professional values; An
understanding of information services; Understanding of principles of secure computing; Core considerations of
information systems acquisition and adaptation; and basic project management skills.
Indicative Content: Information Systems fundamentals; The role of Information Systems in an organisation; The
shift from Data Processing Systems via Information Systems to Knowledge-Based Systems; Information Systems
boundaries; How information and knowledge add value to an organization; The Information Technology component
of Information Systems; Information Systems Engineering. Organizational strategies and objectives; Strategic
planning; Human resource development; Budgeting, costing, charging, hire versus buy decisions; Hardware and
software procurement: request for proposal, evaluation, selection, contracting and maintenance; Security in
computing: continuity of processing, controls and planning for standby; Computer audit; Project management:
approaches, tools, site planning and installation; Implementation strategy; The Information Center;
Reference Books:
i. R. Stair and G. Reynolds, Fundamentals of Information Systems, Course Technology; 5th edition, 2009.
ii. N. Kumar, Management Information System, Anmol Publications PVT. LTD.
iii. L. Jessup and J. Valacich, Information Systems Today: Managing in the Digital World, Prentice Hall, 3rd
edition, 2007.
iv. J. A. O’Brien, Introduction to Information Systems: Essentials for the Internet Worked Enterprise,
Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 2000.
BSE 1205: Research Methodology (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should be able to: Identify interesting
problems of research and develop appropriate strategies to address the problems identified; Demonstrate ethical
consideration in conduction research; Show knowledge and understanding of Statistical and non-Statistical Research
Methods; Use statistical packages to analyze data and make scientifically sound conclusions based on the analysis;
Interpret, explain, and experiment through writing, oral presentation, various multi-media modes, and in a classroom
setting; and demonstrate reflective, reflexive, creative, interpretative, evaluative, critical, and analytical thinking
skills.
Indicative Content: This course is an introduction to research, statistical analysis, and decision making. Close
attention is paid to data types, data contributions, the identification of variables, and descriptive data presentation
techniques. Students are introduced to both parametric and nonparametric data analysis procedures including
independent and dependent sample tests, chi-square analysis, and simple analysis of variance. Hypothesis testing
and the use of statistical software packages are emphasized.
Reference Books;
i. J. M. Ruane, Essentials of Research Methods, Montclair State University, 2004.
BSE 1301: Professional Software Engineering Mini Practical Project I (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should: Demonstrate mastery of a
specific programming language and development platform; Carry out requirement engineering for a particular
project; and demonstrate ability to develop a mini application or systems with minimal difficulty.
Indicative Content: An introduction to a specific professional software certification course is covered.
109

Reference Books:
i. A. Koenig and B. E. Moo, Accelerated C++: Practical Programming by Example, Addison-Wesley, 2008.
ii. J. Friesen, Beginning Java SE 6 Platform: From Novice to Professional, , Apress October 2007,
iii. S. Karam, and R. Freeman, Easy Oracle Jumpstart: Oracle Database Management Concepts and
Administration.
iv. S. Feuerstein, B. Pribyl and C. Dawes, Oracle PL/SQL Language Pocket Reference, 4th edition, OReilly,
2007.
BSE 2102: Software Development Principles II (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the candidate should be: Able to describe the
history of software development and software life cycle management; Able to address various challenges of user
interface design and adaption; Demonstrate ability to carry out system feasibility study and document requirements;
Able to carry out software modularization using one of the most popular software design tools; Show ability to
manage a software development process; Able to design, implement and deploy a software product; and Able to
performance software correctness and testing with minimum difficulties.
Indicative Content: History of software design and development, Software crisis, Software life cycle Management
issues, User interfacing, Documentation, Requirements Analysis and Definition, Feasibility study, System
specification, Functional software specification Methods, Tools, Design Methodologies: structured design,
functional decomposition, data-flow (data-driven), data structure (Jackson), object-oriented design, Tools:
abstraction, structure chart, data-flow diagram, Programme design language, structured walkthrough,
Implementation and Testing, Programming environments, teams, languages, and style, Strategies for maintainability
and reusability, Test case design, Programme testing, and system testing, Quality assurance, verification, validation,
reliability, Testing methodologies, Evolution, Operation; performance analysis and measurement Maintenance
Reference Books:
i. B. Boehm and R. Turner, Balancing Agility and Discipline: A Guide for the Perplexed, Addison Wesley
Professional, 2003
ii. A. M. Davis, 201 Principles of Software Development, McGraw-Hill, 1995
BSE 2105: Formal Methods (3 CU)
Course Description: Demonstrate factual knowledge including the mathematical notation and terminology used in
the course; Be able describe the fundamental principles including the laws and theorems arising from the concepts
covered in this course; Be able to apply course material along with techniques and procedures covered in this course
to solve practical problems; and demonstrate programming skills by writing numerical Programmes, such as Mat lab
Programmes, to solve the above problems.
Indicative Content: Foundations; Basic concepts; Verification; Tools and systems; animation – Miranda and ZANS
Nitpick; The OBJ family of languages, LARCH. Optional Topics (as time permits): State charts, Integrated creation
of a Programme and its correctness proof 3; Automatic Programme synthesis, Scripting Languages.
Reference Books:
i. A. Diller, Z: An Introduction to Formal Methods, 2nd edition, Wiley, 1994.
ii. M. Huth and M. Ryan, Logic in Computer Science: Modelling and Reasoning about Systems, Cambridge
University Press; 2nd edition,2004.
iii. R .Gupta, P. Le Guernic, S. K. Shukla, and J. P. Talpin, Formal Methods and Models for System Design: A
System Level Perspective, (Eds.), 2004.
110

BSE 2103: Principles of Programming II (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion the students should be able to: Demonstrate mastery of core
programming concepts, like Programme structure and control, Application Programme Interface (API), memory
management among others; Demonstrate sufficient understanding of object oriented programming; Develop
complex web and stand alone applications; Work with an Integrate Development Kit like NETBEANS with minimal
difficulties; and differentiate the various programming languages (i.e., in terms of their strength and weakness). The
Indicative Content: Formal definition of structures: formal description of syntax and semantics; Meta - Language;
Comparative studies of programming languages and language design concepts: structural organization, structures for
names, data abstractions, concurrency; Functional, object oriented, and logic programming languages and concepts;
Language design principles.
Reference Books:
i. R.W. Sebesta, Concepts of Programming Languages, 5th edition, Addison Wesley, 2002.
ii. R. Sethi, Progamming Languages: Concepts and Constructs, 2nd edition. Addison Wesley. 1996.
iii. Y. Daniel Liang, Introduction to Java Programming: Comprehensive Version, Prentice Hall, 2006.
CSC 2100: Data Structures and Algorithms (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion the students should be able to: Demonstrate factual knowledge
including the mathematical notation, syntax and terminology used in the course; describe the fundamental principles
including the laws and theorems arising from the concepts covered in this course; Apply course material along with
techniques and procedures covered in this course to solve practical problems; Design simple algorithms and data
structures in C; and Use theories and concepts covered in the course to approximate the complexities of algorithms.
Indicative Content: Methods for modularizing, documenting and constructing Programmes (abstract data types/
object orientation), and an introduction to classical data structures and algorithms with complexity analysis. Detailed
Course Content: Application and implementation of strings, arrays, stacks queues, lists, trees and graphs.; Abstract
data types; storage management; Sorting, searching, merging, reference and cross-referencing files; Design and
analysis of algorithms, complexity of algorithms, big-O and small-O notation. Binary trees, B-trees, B*-trees, and
AVL-trees; Study of disk and tape file organizations; Creation of sequential, direct, and indexed sequential files;
Hashing techniques and address overflows; Primary and secondary key usage, inverted and linked-list files;
Semantic Nets, frames.
Reference Books:
i. M. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley, 1997.
ii. M. A. Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in Java, Pearson International.
BSE 2101: Introduction to Database Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of the course, students should be able to: Develop a sound data model for an
application domain; Realize this model as a relational database schema; Implement this schema as a PostgreSQL
application; Build an HTML/forms based (PHP) interface to a relational database; Analyse the costs/benefits of data
structures and algorithms used in the implementation of relational database management systems; Understand the
theory and techniques behind managing concurrent access to databases and recovery from errors; and Appreciate the
limitations of existing relational database technology and have an overview of upcoming database technologies.
Indicative Content: An introduction to SQL, Advanced SQL, Query-By-Example (QBE), Visual Basic and other
fourth generation languages will be given. This subject aims to explore the theory behind relational database
systems, the practice of developing database applications, and the technologies used to implement database
management systems. This course will also cover introduction to Microsoft Access.
111

Reference Books:
i. H. G-Molina, J. D. Ullman, and J. Widom, Database Systems: The Complete Book, Prentice Hall. 2002.
ii. R. Elmasri and S. B. Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th edition.
BSE 2104: Computer Architecture (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should: Have gained an understanding
of basic components of the modern computer system; Be able to describe the operation of the various logic gets; Be
able to design digital circuits; Demonstrate a good understanding of sequential and parallel processing; Perform low
level assembly programming; and perform low level memory management.
Indicative Content: Computer Organization and Structures (based on the Von Neumann architecture); Processor
unit organization: control unit, ALU, processor register and internal buses; hardwired and micro-programmed
control. Instructions sets, formats and types; Addressing modes, stacks, pipelining, RISC/CISC concepts; Memory
organization and addressing; Memory hierarchy and cache; Special-purpose co-processors; I/O facilities and storage
devices; The Operating System level.
Reference Books:
i. D. A. Patterson and J. L. Hennessy, Computer Architectures: A Quantitative Approach, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 3rd edition, 2003.
ii. A. S. Tanenbaum, Structured Computer Organisation, 4th edition, Prentice Hall inc., Upper Saddle River,
1999.
BSE 2200: Systems Software (4 CU)
Course Description: By the end of this course, Students will understand the various levels of system and
application software; They will be familiar with the major Operating System services such as file systems, memory
management, process management, device control and network services; They will understand how design decisions
in Operating Systems affect users of the system; In addition, students will have used a major Operating System
extensively, with experience in using an interactive command line programming language; and They will also will
have experience in using a systems programming language with an Application Programmers Interface to the
Operating System for its services based on Unix OS, and the C systems programming language.
Indicative Content: This course looks at the necessary system architecture introduction for further study of
operating systems, computer architectures, and the implementation of higher level languages. It goes further and
builds upon that by looking at the concepts underlying Operating Systems, and to show how different choices in
Operating System design and implementation have effects on applications, application programmers and user
environments.
Reference Books:
i. L. L. Beck, System Software: An Introduction to Systems Programming, Addison Wesley; 3rd edition,
August, 1996.
ii. A. S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating Systems, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall 2001.
iii. A. Silberschatz, P. B. Galvin and G. Gagne, Operating Systems Concepts, 6th edition, John Wiley & Sons
2002.
BSE 2201 Network Application Development (4 CU)
Course Description: This course is designed to: Familiarize students with technologies and protocols that support
computer communication networks, including the Internet; and elaborate on network based programming
methodologies, languages, tools and standards.
Indicative Content: Design principles for network-based applications; design and development of Java Servlets,
JSP, Web services and .NET; principles of information security in network-based applications; http and https
protocols.
112

Reference Books:
i. M. Hall, Core Servlets and Java Server Pages, Volume 1: Core Technologies, 2nd edition.
BSE 2203: Computer Networks & Data Communication (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course students should be able to: Master the terminology
and concepts of the OSI reference model and the TCP/IP reference model; Master the concepts of protocols,
network interfaces, and design/performance issues in local area networks and wide area networks; Demonstrate
knowledge of wireless networking concepts; Appreciate contemporary issues in networking technologies; and
demonstrate knowledge of network tools.
Indicative Content: Introduction to Networks: definition, advantages, types, configurations; The OSI/ISO reference
model; Transmission media: magnetic media, twisted pair, coaxial, fiber-optics; Data encoding: straight,
Manchester, differential Manchester, satellite; Digital versus Analog transmission; Modems, modulation and their
standards, codes and pulse code modulation; Integrated Services Digital Networks (ISDN); Network Access
Protocols; Passive versus dynamic allocation; LAN standards:802.3 (Ethernet), 802.4 (token bus), 802.5 (token
ring); Computer Network security, Active and Passive Attacks; Network layer and Network layer protocols;
Transport layer and Transport layer protocols. Furthermore, the course considers problems on each layer of a
multilayered communication model, and describes some typical solutions to such problems.
Reference Books:
i. J. F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, Computer Networking - A Top Down Approach Featuring the Internet, 3rd
edition, Addison-Wesley.
ii. L. Peterson and B. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach.
BSE 2204: Modeling in Information Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should: Be able to demonstrate
sufficient understanding of the various modeling tools and techniques; Be able to model an information system
using the Universal Modeling Language (UML); Be able to model business processes; Select a suitable modeling
language based on the context; and be able to evaluate the quality of models using model checking tools and formal
methods:
Indicative Content: This course deals with methods and techniques used in systems analysis and design. This
includes modeling the enterprise, application domains, business processes and activities, and information systems
components. Main topics to be covered are: Modeling the enterprise: Object-oriented concepts, object-oriented
enterprise modeling. Modeling the business process: process and workflow modeling, IDEF0, and SAP R/3 process
models, Modeling the dynamics: Data flow diagram (DFD), structured English, decision table, decision tree, and
state-transition diagram. Modeling the structures: Entity-relationship (ER) models. Putting the designs together:
Unified Modeling Language (UML) Evaluation of methods: Evaluation criteria.
Reference Books:
i. A. Olive, Conceptual Modeling of Information Systems, Springer, 1st edition, 2007.
ii. R. A. Hirschheim, H. K. Klein and K. Lyytinen, Information Systems Development and Data Modeling:
Conceptual and Philosophical Foundations, Cambridge University Press, 1995.
BSE 2202: Embedded Systems Software (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Understand the role of assembly
language programming; Understand the instruction set of a typical embedded processor (68HC11); Be able to
employ a modular approach to assembly language programming with code reuse; Be able to use embedded systems
development tools; Understand memory addressing and use various addressing modes; Understand hardware
interrupts and be able to use them; and be able to integrate assembly language subroutines into a high-level language
Programme.
113

Indicative Content: This course presents assembly language programming as the bridge between hardware and
high-level programming languages such as C++. Topics covered include the addressing modes, register file, and
instruction set of a microcontroller; subsystems such as timers, handshaking input and output, and analog to digital
conversion; and interrupts. Software control of hardware is stressed. In the laboratory, students design software to
demonstrate proficiency in these areas. Introduction to microcomputer/microcontroller structure from a
programmers perspective; 68hc11 addressing modes and memory types; Tool usage (assembler, linker, downloader,
simulator); 68hc11 instruction set (5 classes) Assembly language Programmes structure, including comparisons to
high level languages; Parallel I/O with handshaking; Analog I/O on the 68hc11 plus background on A/D and D/A
converters; Hardware interrupts.
Reference Book:
i. S. A. Edwards, Languages for Digital Embedded Systems, Kluwer Academic Press, 2000.
BSE 2302: Professional Software Engineering Mini Practical Project II (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of the course, the student should: Demonstrate mastery of a
specific programming language and development platform; Carry out requirement engineering for a particular
project; and demonstrate ability to develop a mini application or systems with minimal difficulty.
Indicative Content: An introduction to a specific professional software certification course is covered.
Reference Books:
i. A. Koenig and B. E. Moo, Accelerated C++: Practical Programming by Example, Addison-Wesley, 2008.
ii. J. Friesen, Beginning Java SE 6 Platform: From Novice to Professional, Apress October 2007.
iii. S. Karam, and R. Freeman, Easy Oracle Jumpstart: Oracle Database Management Concepts and
Administration.
iv. S. Feuerstein, B. Pribyl and C. Dawes, Oracle PL/SQL Language Pocket Reference, 4th edition, O’Reilly
2007.
BSE 3101: IT Project Management and Development (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course, students will: Appreciate the range of practical project management
techniques available; be able to apply project management principles and techniques within their organizations; and
be able to confidently undertake the management of a project and see it to a satisfactory conclusion on time and
within budget.
Indicative Content:
• Integration Management includes the processes required to ensure that the various elements of the project
are properly co-coordinated.
• Scope Management is the function of controlling a project in terms of its aims, goals and objectives
through the process of conceptual development, full scope definition or statement, scope reporting and
control, and project close out.
• Time Management is the function of maintaining appropriate allocation of time to every element in the
overall conduct of the project through the successive stages of its natural life-cycle.
• Cost Management is the function of maintaining effective financial control of the project.
• Quality Management is the composite of material attributes (including performance features and
characteristics) of the product or service which are required to satisfy the needs for which the project is
being undertaken.
• Human Resource Management is the function of directing and coordinating human resources throughout
the life of the project. It involves the application of the principles of behavioral science and administrative
knowledge to achieve the predetermined project objectives of scope, time, cost, quality and participant
satisfaction.
114

• Communications Management includes the processes required to ensure timely and appropriate generation,
collection, dissemination, storage and ultimate disposition of project information.
• Risk Management includes the processes concerned with identifying, analysing and responding to project
risk. It includes maximising the results of positive events and minimising the consequences of adverse
events.
• Procurement Management is the function of acquiring resources for the project in order to produce the end
product.
Reference Book:
i. D. Billows, Advanced Project Management Techniques, PMP.
BSE 3104: Software Metrics (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course students should be able to: Describe software
metrics; understand the foundations of measurement theory and models of software engineering measurement and
appreciate software products metrics, software process metrics and measuring management.
Indicative Content: The course is composed of the following basic modules: Measurement theory (overview of
software metrics, basics of measurement theory, goal-based framework for software measurement, empirical
investigation in software engineering), Software product and process measurements (measuring internal product
attributes: size and structure, measuring external product attributes: quality, measuring cost and effort, measuring
software reliability, software test metrics, object-oriented metrics Measurement management.
Reference Books:
i. N.E. Fenton and S.L. Pfleeger, Software Metrics: A Rigorous and Practical Approach, 2nd edition (638p.),
PWS Publishing, 1998.
ii. S. H. Kan, Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering, 2nd edition (560 p.) Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2002.
iii. J. C. Munson, Software Engineering Measurement, Auerbach Publications, 2003.
iv. C. Jones, Applied Software Measurement: Assuring Productivity and Quality, McGraw-Hill, 1996.
CSC 2111 Database Management Systems I (3 CU)
Course Description: This course is to provide students with a strong foundation in systematic approaches to design
and implementing of database applications. Preliminarily, operations like requirements gathering and database
planning will be covered. The course will also introduce students to developing of application Programmes that talk
to the database. These applications may be online or offline. The aims of the course are to: Provide a background for
the evolution of database (management) systems; Provide the students with the steps one has to go through when
developing good database applications; Give hand on experience and knowledge in developing database (driven)
applications
Indicative Content: Background to databases; Evolution of database systems; Database organization and
architecture; Data base models; Over view of database application development; The database development life
cycle; Database design; Conceptual design; Logical design; Physical Design; Querying databases; SQL/PL SQL
and Scripting.
Reference Books:
i. T. Connolly and C. Begg, Database Solutions, 2nd edition.
BSE 3102: Object-Oriented Software Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to: Understand the entire software
engineering project process, which consists of object-oriented analysis, design, programming and testing;
Understand basic object-oriented programming concepts; Effectively use the main features of the object-oriented
115

programming language Java; Gain experience in implementing object-oriented Programmes in Java; Apply an
iterative, use case-driven process to the development of a robust design model; Use UML to represent the design
model; Apply the OO concepts abstraction, encapsulation, inheritance, hierarchy, modularity, and polymorphism to
the development of a robust design model; and Design and implement a software system using object-oriented
software engineering paradigm.
Indicative Content: In particular the course covers the following main themes and associated topics: Systems
modeling and Design Software Engineering processes and principles of good software design. UML modeling and
design with particular emphasis on software architecture, behavioral modeling, object interactions and state-charts.
Formal specifications of system requirements Principles of formal specifications and object orientation, state and
operation schemas; class schemas, object aggregation and inheritance; specification of dependency and information
sharing; definition of class union; semantic issues; reasoning techniques for validating invariant properties, such as
safety and liveness; Specification of object oriented Programmes Principles of object-oriented Programme
specifications, concepts of mid-conditions, pre-conditions and post-conditions of methods, the role and definition of
class invariants; loop invariants as a programming technique; techniques for reasoning about the correctness of
Programmes. The development process Generation of specifications of object-oriented Programmes from formal
specifications of system requirement; validation and verification processes of software system; acquisition of
practical experience in modelling and specifying Java Programmes, using appropriate tools for developing and
checking specifications of Java Programmes.
Reference Books:
i. C. Larman, Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and Design and the
Unified Process, 2nd edition, Prentice-Hall, 2002.
ii. S. R. Schach, Object Oriented and Classical Software Engineering, 7th edition, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
iii. R. S. Pressman and D. Ince, Software Engineering A Practitioners Approach, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
iv. I. Sommerville, Software Engineering, 8th edition, Addison Wesley, 2006.
v. R.H. Thayer, and M. J. Christiansen, Software Engineering, Volume 1: The Development Process, 3rd
edition, Wiley & Sons, 2005.
vi. R. H. Thayer and M. Dorfman, Software Engineering, Volume 2: The Supporting Processes, 3rd edition,
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
BSE 3107: Real-Time and Embedded Systems (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course students should be able to: Demonstrate knowledge of rate monotonic
theory and how to apply it to real-time applications; Understand the process and fundamentals of integrating
microprocessor-based embedded system elements to realize systems that not only meet functional requirements, but
timing and performance requirements as well; and Use practical skills to design and integrate a real-time operation
system with a microprocessor to host real-time service data processing.
Indicative Content: Rate Monotonic Theory, specifically the RM least upper bound, necessary and sufficient
feasibility tests, and application of rate monotonic theory , Real-time Operating Systems, scheduling,
synchronization mechanisms, and resource management, Embedded system architectures: System-on-chip, scalable
bus architectures, memory subsystems, Sensor and Actuator IO: ADC, DAC, servos, relays, stepper motors, Hbridge,
and CODECs, Real-time embedded test equipment, software debug tools, and methods of performance
profiling and tracing, Real-time applications including voice/packet-switched links and networks, streaming video
media, computer vision, digital control, and robotic system command and control.
Reference Books:
i. M. Ben-Ari, Principles of Concurrent and Distributed Programming, Prentice Hall, 1990.
ii. S. Bennett, Real-Time Computer Control: An Introduction Series in Systems and Control Engineering,
International Prentice Hall, 1988.
116

iii. A. Burns and A. Wellings, Real-Time Systems and Programming Languages, Addison Wesley, 3rd edition,
2001.
BSE 3103: Requirements Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course students should be able to: Understand the principles, tools, and
techniques for requirements elicitation, specification, and analysis; demonstrate the role of requirements in system
development and maintenance; and appreciate the difficulties of specifying requirements for real systems, as well as
effective methods tools and techniques.
Indicative Content: System and Software System Engineering; Software Requirements Concepts; Requirements
Elicitation; Software Requirements Analysis, Software Requirements Specifications, Software Requirements Tools,
Software Requirements Verification; Software Requirements Engineering Management; Developing a Successful
Software Requirement.
Reference Books:
i. P. Loucopoulos and V. Karakostas, System Requirements Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
ii. D. Leffingwell, D. Widrig, A. Wesley, Managing Software Requirements: A Use Case Approach, 2nd
edition, Boston.
iii. L. Chung, B. Nixon, E. Yu and J. Mylopoulos, Non-Functional Requirements in Software Engineering,
Kluwer Academic Publishing, 2000.
iv. A. M. Davis, Software Requirements: Objects, Functions, & States, Prentice Hall: Englewood Cliffs, 1993.
v. R. H. Thayer and M. Dortman, System and Software Requirements Engineering: Tutorial, (Editors), IEEE
Computer Society Press.
BSE 3105: Software Evolution (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students will learn: How selected software systems can be analyzed to
understand properties of their evolution; and interpret their implication.
Indicative Content: Separate compilation; design issues; verification and validation; integrating components;
documentation , Issues in object-oriented programming; parallelism; event centered programming; common design
patterns; software reuse, The Laws of Software Evolution Client-server computing: Software support needed for
client and server implementation; varieties of server structures; Reverse engineering and reverse engineering tools,
recognizing software architecture and design patterns in existing software systems Software transformation,
migration, and reengineering, recovering software components for reuse
Reference Books:
i. L. J. Arthur, Software Evolution: A Software Maintenance Challenge, John Wiley & Sons, 1988.
ii. R. C. Seacord, D. Plakosh, and G. A. Lewis, Modernizing Legacy Systems: Software Technologies,
Engineering Processes, and Business Practices, Addison-Wesley Pub Co; 1st edition, 2003.
iii. T. M. Pigoski, Practical Software Maintenance: Best Practices for Managing Your Software Investment,
John Wiley & Sons, 1st edition, 1996.
iv. D. D. Smith, Designing Maintainable Software, Springer-Verlag, 1999.
v. R. B. Grady, Software Metrics: Establishing A Company-Wide Program, Prentice Hall; 1st edition, 1987.
BSE 3106: Mobile Networks and Computing (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course, students will be able to: Understand the basic principle, architecture
and challenges of wireless networks and mobile computing systems; and demonstrate knowledge of software
development related to mobile computing systems.
117

Indicative Content: The topics for wireless networking include GSM, Wireless LANs, GPRS, Mobile IP, wireless
ATM, Mobile Ad Hoc Networking and internetworking with TCP/IP. As well as mobile computing models in
general, the SMS Bluetooth, WAP and I-mode will be introduced as typical mobile computing systems.
Reference Book:
i. D. Milojicic, F. Douglis and R. Wheeler, Mobility: Processes, Computers, and Agents, Eds., Addison
Wesley, 1999.
BSE 3201: Software Architecture (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course, students will: Be familiar with the latest state of- the-art software
architecture; Appreciate software system design; and understand how system’s components are meant to interact
with each other.
Indicative Content: Architectural styles, Components of architectural design, Connectors, components,
composition, Architectural design guidance and Tools for architectural design, Achieving quality goals with
architectural styles, Formal models and specifications, Analyzing software architecture with SAAM, Architecture
description languages (ADLs), Architecture-based development, Patterns in software architecture, Reusing software
architecture.
Reference Books:
i. L. Bass, P. Clements and R. Kazman, Software Architecture in Practice, Addison Wesley, 1998.
ii. Shaw and Garlan, Software Architecture: Perspectives on an Emerging Discipline, PrenticeHall, 1996.
iii. Cheesman and Daniels, UML Components: A simple process for specifying component-based software,
Addison-Wesley, 2000.
BSE 3202: Distributed Systems Development (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course students should be able to: Present a conceptual model of distributed
systems; Describe key components of a distributed system and evaluate the Trade offs of alternative architectural
models; Suggest algorithm suitable for application in distributed systems; Build prototype implementations of
distributed systems; and demonstrate an understanding of the challenges faced by future distributed systems.
Indicative Content; Event-driven software architectures; distributed object computing, and developing,
documenting, and testing applications using object-oriented frameworks and design patterns. Techniques that enable
the construction of reusable, extensible, efficient, and maintainable concurrent and distributed software systems are
emphasized. Abstraction based on patterns and object-oriented techniques will be crucial throughout the course, and
their application studied in several in-depth case studies.
Reference Books:
i. S. Tanenbaum and M. V. Steen, Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall,
2006.
ii. G. Coulouris, J. Dollimore, and T. Kindberg, Distributed Systems: Concepts and Design, 3rd edition,
Addison-Wesley, 2000.
iii. R. Anderson, Security Engineering: A Guide to Building Dependable Distributed Systems, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001.
BSE 3205: UNIX Shell Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: At the end of the course students should be able to: use the UNIX operating system for
information handling and software development; and develop engineering applications using c language in a UNIX
environment.
Indicative Content: This course introduces the UNIX operating system as a basic environment for information
handling and software development. It covers the UNIX file system, job control, and processes using both the C
118

shell and Korn shell, common UNIX utilities (sed, awk, grep), UNIX networking utilities, piping and redirection,
and an introduction to shell programming. Computer engineering applications programming using the C language in
a UNIX environment; Use of UNIX tools including filters and shell scripts; Overview of UNIX software design
practices using tools such as Make and SCCS; The UNIX system interface; Software design projects. Other topics
include advanced programming in both the C shell and the Korn shell using project management tools (SCCS or
RCS), using software development tools (make), and an introduction to system administration.
Reference Books:
i. Morris I. Bolsky, David G. Korn, The New KornShell Command And Programming Language.
ii. D. O’Brien, D. Pitts (Contributor), Korn Shell Programming by Example.
iii. A. Olczak,The Korn Shell Linux and Unix Programming Manual, 2nd edition.
iv. Ken. O. Burtch, Linux Shell Scripting with Bash.
v. S. Kochan and P. Wood, Unix Shell Programming, 3rd edition.
BSE 3206: Computer Graphics (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course students should be able to: Demonstrate knowledge
of a general purpose graphics system and its use; Show that consistent design of user interfaces based on existing
standards are important; and Appreciate the domain of computer graphics and graphical user interfaces in general.
Indicative Content: graphics hardware, geometrical transformations, surface and volume visualization, design and
implementation of graphical user interfaces; two dimensional imaging processes; Computer graphics applications.
Introduction to computer graphics; Display system organization; Display devices and modes; Display file
construction and its structure; Graphic primitive - device initialization, view porting and windowing; Line drawing,
simple and symmetrical Digital Deferential Analysis (DDA); Arch and circle generating DDA Line; and polygon
clipping algorithms; Curve plotting; Transformations- projections and perspective views; Picture segmentation:
Graphics standards - PHIGS and GKS.
Reference Books:
i. D. Hearn, M.P. Baker, Computer Graphics, 2nd edition (C Version), Prentice-Hall, 1997.
ii. J. D. Foley, A. Van-Dam, S. K. Feiner and J. F. Hughes, Computer Graphics - Principles and Practice 2nd
edition in C, Addison-Wesley, 1996.
iii. P. Burger and D. Gillies, Interactive Computer Graphics - Functional, Procedural and Device-Level
Methods, Addison-Wesley, 1989.
iv. A. Watt and M. Watt, Advanced Animation and Rendering Techniques, Addison-Wesley, 1992.
v. J. Prosise, Programming Windows with MFC, Microsoft Press; 2nd edition, 1999.
vi. Woo, Manson. et al., OpenGL Programming Guide, Addison-Wesley, 1999.
BSE 3203: Object-Oriented Programming (4 CU)
Course Description: In this course, students will learn: Object oriented design and software development by
performing and discussing OO design for re-use of general purpose applications and small Java applets;
Demonstrate correct use of the basic Java features in a working Programme: objects, classes, methods, IO handling,
decisions and iterations; Demonstrate correct use of the following advanced Java features in a working Programme:
inheritance, encapsulation, overloading, polymorphism, abstract classes and interfaces; and Demonstrate knowledge
of GUI-based event-driven programming in a working Programme assignment utilizing Java GUI components,
event listeners and event-handlers.
Indicative Content: the Java API and Abstract Windowing Toolkit. Other topics covered include the use of Java as
an object-oriented programming language including encapsulation, simple inheritance, and polymorphism; design of
Java classes using Java interfaces and packages; implement design patterns in working Java code, and demonstrate
119

use of Java Base Classes, including AWT. Java foundation classes including Swing and JavaBeans will be discussed
briefly, along with the selection and application of current design and development tools.
Reference Books:
i. J. Hubbard, Programming in C++, McGraw Hill, Schaum’s Outline Series, 2000.
ii. Y. D. Liang, Introduction to Programming with C++ (Brief Version), Prentice Hall, 2007.
CSC 3202: Concepts of CAD/CAM (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion students will be able to: Understand the basic concepts of
CAD/CAM; Demonstrate knowledge and skill in applying computer and scientific principles related to solving
engineering and manufacturing problems; and develop an understanding of engineering design and learn how to
provide technical assistance in managing CAD/CAM systems.
Indicative Content: Concepts of modelling in CAD/CAM; Designing of specifications for interactive software
packages in grafting; Designing and manufacturing applications; Design and development of algorithms;
Methodologies of problem solving in design; Role of geometric models in CAD/CAM; Techniques of displaying
models using computer optimization; Concepts of data representations in CAD/CAM problems; Discussion on large
numbers of case studies involving software development of various problems in CAD/CAM.
Reference Books:
i. I. Zeid, CAD/CAM, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
ii. J. Rooney & P. Steadman, Principles of Computer Aided Design, Pitman/ Open University, London.
iii. J. Rooney & P. Steadman, Computer Aided Design, Pitman/Open University, London.
iv. G. Mallineuse, Computational Concepts and Methods, Kogan Page Ltd. London.
v. D. L. Rayan, Computer Aided Graphical Design, Marcel Dekker, New York.
BSE 3204: Human-Computer Interface Design (4 CU)
Course Description: The students will throughout the course: Get a thorough understanding of the nature of manmachine
communication; Use acquired knowledge in designing user interfaces; Become familiar with the variety of
design and evaluation methods used in interface design; and use these methods in their projects.
Indicative Content: Methods and techniques for designing user interfaces will be presented. These will include
command-based systems, menus, graphical interfaces, desktop techniques and direct manipulation. Principles for
user-friendly interfaces will be discussed using case studies from commercial Programmes (Windows, Word, DOS,
UNIX, LINUX, others). Human performance: memory, perception, skill learning, task closures motivation,
performance, motor skills, attention; Types of users: casual, naive, learning, expert; Collecting and evaluating
behavioral data; System performance and its erect on users: response data; Styles of interaction: command language,
form-fill, direct manipulation, hierarchical/network systems; desk-top metaphor, browsing; Help mechanisms:
conventional, context sensitive, hyper text, error handling, implicit cues; Graphics: tools and graphical user
interfaces; Dialogue design methods: dialogue principles, dialogue description languages; task analysis and
ergonomics.
Reference Book:
i. B. Shneiderman & C. Plaisant, Designing the User Interface: Strategies for Effective Human-Computer
Interaction, 4th edition, Publisher: Addison Wesley.
BSE 3301: Internship (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion students will: Have gained work experience that allows them to
sample professional environments in which they might seek careers; and have experience that will help prepare them
for careers and research.
120

Indicative Content: The students shall be attached to an industrial partner with business in the area of software
engineering or heavy bias in Information technology. During this time, the student shall be visited at least twice by a
professor or lecturer to assess the performance of the student in the industry. The students shall acquire hands on
training in maintenance, servicing and troubleshooting, and training in computer skills and applications as well as
software development. Hardware maintenance; Practicals; On Job training; project management, requirement
engineering, product conceptualized, Report writing including communication skills, project coordination, team
organisation, product branding. Based on the trading experience the candidate will be expected to pick ideas to
develop for the final year project.
Reference:
There is no particular reference material for internship, except whatever may be recommended by the student
supervisors
BSE 4100: Software Engineering project I (5 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course the student will have ability to: Demonstrate
independent skills in collecting requirements, documenting user requirements and technical requirements for nontrivial
software engineering/ research projects by pursuing a lengthy Software engineering project; and demonstrate
skills of specifying, designing and implementing a project, with assistance of one of the Professors/ Lecturers as
adviser/ supervisor.
Indicative Content: The student develops a framework within which research will be conducted and offers
evidence of qualifications to pursue the research. Concepts and theories underlying the student’s Project research are
articulated, the problem is clearly stated, and specific, measurable goals are specified, a literature review is
presented, the methods of conducting research are delineated, and strategy to achieve the goal is given. The specific
deliverables are a requirements document clearly specified in well-known and acceptable notation; Technical
Specification Document Detailed design document. References No particular reference will be used for this course
unit, except whatever is recommended by the student supervisors.
Reference:
No particular reference will be used for this course unit, except whatever is recommended by the student
supervisors.
BSE 4101: Software Reliability and Testing (4 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course the student will have ability to: Understand the
software reliability process and reliability growth models; Show techniques to improve and predict software
reliability; and appreciate concepts such as operational profiles, techniques to improve and predict software
reliability, preparing and executing test, black box testing, white box testing, unit testing, system testing, and
integration testing.
Indicative Content: This course introduces software reliability process, reliability growth models and shows
techniques to improve and predict software reliability. Concepts such as defining necessary reliability, developing
operational profiles, techniques to improve and predict software reliability, preparing and executing test, black box
testing, white box testing, unit testing, system testing, and integration testing will be explained.
Reference Books:
i. J. D. Musa, Software Reliability Engineering: More Reliable Software Faster and Cheaper, Author house,
2nd edition, (632 p.), 2004.
ii. M. R. Lyu (Editor), Handbook of Software Reliability Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1996.
iii. J. D. Musa, A. Iannini, K. Okumoto, Software Reliability: Measurement, Prediction and Application, (621
p.), McGraw-Hill, 1987.
iv. W. E. Perry, Effective Methods for Software Testing, 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
121

BSE 4103: Entrepreneurship and Business (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course the student will have ability to: Systematically
apply an entrepreneurial way of thinking that will allow them to create and identify business opportunities that may
be commercialized successfully; and appreciate the differences between newly formed ventures, existing small to
medium size growth-oriented ventures, and entrepreneurial ventures within larger organizations.
Indicative Content: Entrepreneurship is the process of building something from nothing. It is the process of seizing
or creating opportunity without regard to the resources you control. The organizational aspects of consultancies and
client responsibilities within the framework of corporate management. Topics include: contracts fees, legal issues,
patents, copyrights, hourly rates, hiring and employment concerns, timekeeping and invoicing, and intellectual
property. The course involves preparation of proposals and visits by appropriate professionals
Reference Books:
i. J. W. Halloran, 36-hour Course: Entrepreneurship, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
ii. B. R. Barrington, One Key Course Compass, Student Access Kit to Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, 2005.
BSE 4102: Ethics for Professional Engineers (3CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Apply the ethical concepts
relevant to resolving moral issues in business, industry, and other relevant areas of concern; and articulate and
defend with good reasons his/her own ethical point of view pertaining to specific problem areas in business,
industry, and related areas.
Indicative Content: This course examines and evaluates the meaning of ethics and professional conduct. A guiding
theme is the human search or quest for values and ethical direction in terms of professional conduct and our daily
life relationships with others. Students are expected to articulate and evaluate their own ethical principles and values
and their foundations. The first part of this course covers the nature of ethics, ethical development, responsibilities
and basic ethical directions such as Aristotelian ethics, utilitarian ethics, Kantian ethics and rights, and various views
of justice. The second part of the course covers specific business and engineering ethical issues such as the
company’s and engineer’s ethical obligation to the public, employer-employee ethical obligations including such
topics as the giving and receiving of gifts, employee theft, trade secrets, computer ethics, fair wages, safety, working
conditions, job satisfaction, employee rights with special emphasis on whistle-blowing, the ethics of political tactics
to advance one’s career, and discrimination and affirmative action. Also, emphasis is given to environmental ethics
including such topics as pollution control, the conservation of natural resources, various ethical positions on the
environment, as well as such topics as biomedical ethics, treatment of animals, and the ethical assessment of new
technologies.
References Books:
i. C. B. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, 1st edition Prentice Hall 1999.
ii. D. J. Kemper, B. R. Sanders, Engineers and Their Profession, Oxford University Press, USA.
iii. M. Krisen, Engineering, Business and Professional Ethics, Elsevier Science & Technology, 2007.
BSE 4200: Software Engineering project II (5 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course the student will have ability to: Demonstrate
independent skills in implementing non-trivial software engineering/ research projects by pursuing a lengthy
Software engineering project; and Demonstrate skills of Documenting, deploying a testing a well engineered
solution, with assistance of one of the Professors/ Lecturers as adviser/ supervisor.
Indicative Content: The student implements, documents, tests and deploys a software solution using the state of the
art principles, concepts and technologies The specific deliverables are: Software Implementation using state of the
art technologies Detailed software documentation in accordance to well known practices Installation Manuals User
Manual Testing and validation strategy.
122

BSE 4201: Software Design Patterns (4 CU)
Course Description: Design patterns are standard solutions to common software design problems. Instead of
focusing on how individual components work, design patterns are a systematic approach that focus and describe
abstract systems of interaction between classes, objects, and communication flow. This course explores advanced
principles of object-oriented design by studying key software design patterns. The patterns are drawn from a variety
of sources and illustrated through examples and case studies. Examples are presented in Java, C++ or C sharp.
Students will also have an opportunity to apply these patterns through a series of hands-on exercises.
Indicative Content: Basic Patterns: Structural patterns Creational patterns; Behavioral Grasp and Cooper, Vlissides
Pattern Hatching; Relationships between Patterns: Pree’sMetapatterns Zimmers Relations. Tichys classification,
Classification in; Automation of Patterns: Automation of Design Patterns Together, OpenJava and Design Patterns,
Compost/Recoder Refactoring Copliens Symmetries; Historic Roots: The timeless way of building; Advanced
Patterns: Parallelism Patterns Exclusion, State Dependence, PLOP2, Coordination; Reactive patterns Analysis
Patterns Re engineering Patterns Automation of Design Patterns; Process Patterns Organizational Patterns;
Applications of Design Patterns: Extreme Programming Cope: Multi-Paradigm Design
Reference Books:
i. E. Gamma et al. Design Patterns, Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software, Addison Wesley, 1995.
ii. W. Pree. Design Patterns for Object-Oriented Software Development, Wokingham: Addison-Wesley/ACM
Press, 1996.
iii. F. Buschmann, K. Henney, D. C. Schmidt, On Patterns and Pattern Language, 2005.
BSE 4203: Information Technology and Society (3 CU)
Course Description: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Understand the impact of
computerization on society; and appreciate the variety of computerized systems in our everyday life.
Indicative Content: Impact of computers on society; Social structures, their boundaries and development; Ethical
issues (Basic honesty, sincerity, etc.) relating to system development and its use; Systems security and protection;
Dependency constraints, self-reliance; Legal issues relating to computerized systems; Uses and applications of
computers for national development - communication, agriculture, health care delivery, banking, administration,
accounting, planning and decision making.
Reference Books:
i. W. H. Dutton, Information and Communication Technologies: Visions and Realities, Oxford University
Press, 1996.
ii. R. Kling (Ed), Computerization and Controversy: Value conflicts and social choices, Academic Press,
1996.
iii. W. H. Dutton, Society on the Line: information politics in the digital age, Oxford University Press, 1999.
iv. G. Walsham, Interpreting Information Systems in Organisations, John Wiley, 1993.
v. F. Webster, Theories of the Information Society, Routledge, 1995.
BSE 4204: Emerging Trends in Software Engineering (4 CU)
Course Description: Given the rapid nature of the computing discipline, the objective of this course is to equip
students with a set of emerging trends in software engineering that may be encountered in their practice.
Indicative Content: New trends in software engineering not yet introduced in the syllabus will be covered and the
current topics in software engineering and its applications.
References: No particular reference will be used for this course unit, except whatever is recommended by head of
department in consultation with members of the Department.
123

10.0 SHORT COURSES
10.1 Short Courses taught at CIT
• Certificate in Computer Application (CCA)
• CIT Cisco Academy Programmes
o Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA)
o Cisco Certified Network Professional (CCNP)
o IT Essentials I & II
o International Computer Driving License (ICDL)
• Multimedia Certified Courses
o Certificate in Graphics and Image Editing
o Certificate in Video Editing and Animation
o Certificate in Dynamic Website Development
• Microsoft Academy Programmes
o Microsoft Certified Database Administrators (MCDBA)
o Microsoft Certified Systems Engineers (MCSA)
o Microsoft Certified Systems Administrators (MCSE)
o Microsoft Office User Specialists (MOS)
o Microsoft Certified Solutions Developer (MCSD)
• Oracle Programmes
o Oracle Certified Associate (OCA)
o Oracle Certified Professional (OCP)- Proposed
• Staff Development Programme (Advanced End –User Training Programme in ICT Skills)
• Geographical Information Systems(GIS)
• Computer Systems Engineering Course
10.2 Certificate in Computer Applications (CCA)
Students are trained on how to use a Computer and Computer Applications in an office or business setting. CCA
course comprises of: Introduction to Computers and Computer Systems, Introduction to Operating Systems,
Word Processing with Microsoft word, Spreadsheets with Microsoft Excel, and Presentations with Microsoft Power
Point, Databases with Ms. Access, Graphics Design with Corel Draw and Web Technology for managing Email and
using search engines. CCA is a 50 hour course, no matter what times and a date a person chooses to study. CCA
gives a wide and vibrant variety of course which have been carefully chosen to give any individual a good
jump start to computing and making them competent in computing.
Course Content:
• Introduction to Computers and Computer Systems which basically covers the History of Computers,
the types of computers and the different computer parts broken into Hardware and software,
components of the computer and aspects of computing.
• Introduction to Operating Systems which covers the different types of operating systems we have,
choosing a good operating systems and the advantages and disadvantages one has over the other.
• Microsoft Word basically covers using MS Word but emphasis is on Introduction of Ms word, Window
properties and saving, Headers, Footers & Footnotes, find & replace, editing fonts & alignment,
Columns, section & column breaks, tables, Using and creating a mail merge among many.
• Microsoft Excel covers introduction to Excel, properties of the worksheets, using simple formulas
(adding, multiplying etc), Complex formulae (importing formulae, using the paste function & help) and
Charts and the chart wizards, save options & print options.
124

• Microsoft PowerPoint covers Introduction(Auto content wizard, design templates and layouts),
inserting images, charts, audio and video streams, Designing in PowerPoint (certificate or Dinner
cards) and Doing a presentation, animating and slide transitions.
• Microsoft Access covers Introduction to Databases and understanding terms & tables, designing
multiple tables, creating relationships and creating Queries, Forms and Reports.
• Web Technologies which covers understanding networks and Search engines, emailing and sending
attachments.
• CorelDraw basically covers Introduction to CorelDraw, understanding and using the tools and
Designing a business card.
Minimum Admission Requirements:
To be admitted for a course leading to the award of Certificate in Computer Applications, a candidate must know
English.
Note: Individuals intending to attend the CCA course are advised to pay and register early enough before the
commencement of the particular intake they are interested in as admissions to intakes are on first-come-first-served
basis and there is a limit on the class size.
10.3 International Computer Driving License (ICDL)
This course equips students with confidence to participate in the global digital society; improves the students’
quality of life by gaining a better working knowledge of computers; increases their value in the workplaces by
possessing a valuable credential.
Course Content:
Module 1: Basics of Information Technology
Module 2: using a computer and file management Module 3: word processing
Module 4: Microsoft Excel (Spreadsheets)
Module 5: Microsoft access (Database)
Module 6: Microsoft PowerPoint (presentations) Module 3: Information and Communication
Minimum Admission Requirements:
O’ Level certificate is required
10.4 Microsoft Academy Programmes
Since June 2003, the Faculty of Computing and IT has been running a Microsoft IT Academy Programme. To date,
more than 100 students have acquired different IT certifications by attending different Programmes offered in the
Academy. This course prepares students for academic education tracks, career opportunities as Network
Administrators, Technical Support Specialists, Software/Hardware Developers, Design Engineers, and Office
Specialists. Students train in: Visual Studio, NET Professional, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual FoxPro, Visual
InterDev, and Visual J++; Microsoft .NET Enterprise Servers, Windows Server, SQL Server, Exchange Server,
Commerce Server, BizTalk Server, Host Integration Server, Application Center Server, Systems Management
Server, Mobile Information 2001 Server, and Content Management Servers; Microsoft Operating Systems:
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Advanced Server, Windows 2000 Datacenter
Server, Windows 2000 Small Business Server, and Windows XP Professional; Microsoft Office 2000 and
Microsoft Office XP Professional.
The Microsoft IT Academy Programme is a Programme designed to allow accredited academic institutions to deliver to
students a premium education on cutting-edge Microsoft® technologies. From the desktop to networking and
programming, students and employers worldwide look to Microsoft IT Academies for the latest technologies, in-
125

demand skills, and the assurance of the Microsoft quality standard. In line with this general aim, the Microsoft IT
Academy of CIT delivers training in accordance with guidelines issued by Microsoft world-wide. The Academy
follows the Microsoft Official Curriculum guidelines to deliver courses leading to any of the following
certifications:
• Microsoft Certified Database Administrators (MCDBAs)
• Microsoft Certified Systems Engineers (MCSEs)
• Microsoft Certified Systems Administrator (MCSA)
• Microsoft Office User Specialist(MOS)
• Microsoft Certified Solutions Developer (MCSD).
The Academy uses services of Microsoft Certified Trainers (MCTs) to deliver the training. It is a Microsoft basic
requirement that IT Academies associate with MCT certified trainers to ensure that Microsoft’s high technical
training standards are met when training is obtained from the accredited institutions.
i. Programme Structure
Microsoft Certified Database Administrators (MCDBAs)
EXAM REF: DESCRIPTION STATUS
Exam 70-228 Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Enterprise Edition
Exam 70-229: Designing and Implementing Databases with Microsoft SQL
Server 2000 Enterprise Edition
Exam 70-290: Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Environment
Exam 70-291: Implementing, Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Network Infrastructure
126
Core
Core
Core Elective
Core Elective
Exam 70-215: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows Server 2000 Core Elective
Exam 70-216: Implementing and Administering Microsoft Windows 2000
Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-293: Planning and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-175: Designing and Implementing Distributed Applications with
Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0
MCSE on Microsoft Windows 2000 Certification Requirements
Exam 70-210: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows Professional Core
Exam 70-215: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows Server Core
Exam 70-216: Implementing and Administering a Microsoft Windows 2000 Network
Infrastructure
Exam 70-17: Implementing and Administering a Microsoft Windows 2000 Directory
Services Infrastructure
Elective
Elective
Elective
Exam 70-219: Designing a Microsoft Windows 2000 Directory Services Infrastructure Core Elective
Exam 70-220: Designing Security for a Microsoft Windows 2000 Network Core Elective
Exam 70-221: Designing a Microsoft Windows 2000 Network Infrastructure Core Elective
Core
Core

Exam 70-297: Designing a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Active Directory and Network
Infrastructure
127
Core Elective
Exam 70-298: Designing Security for a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Network Core Elective
Exam 70-228: Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Enterprise Edition
MCSE on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Certification Requirements
Exam 70-210: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows Professional Core
Exam 70-290: Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server
2003 Environment
Exam 70-291: Implementing, Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-293: Planning and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server
2003 Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-294: Planning, Implementing and Maintaining a Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Active Directory Infrastructure
Exam 70-297: Designing a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Active Elective
Directory and Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-298: Designing Security for a Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-229: Designing and Implementing Databases with Microsoft
SQL Server 2000 Enterprise Edition
Exam 70-228: Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft SQL
Server 2000 Enterprise Edition
MCSA on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Certification Requirements
Exam 70-210: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows
Professional
Exam 70-290: Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Environment
Exam 70-291: Implementing, Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-228: Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft SQL Server
2000 Enterprise Edition
MCSA on Microsoft Windows 2000 Certification Requirements
Exam 70-210: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows
Professional
Exam 70-215: Installing, Configuring, and Administering Microsoft Windows
Server
Exam 70-218: Managing a Microsoft Windows 2000 Network Environment Core
Exam 70-214: Implementing and Administering Security in a Microsoft
Windows 2000 Network
Elective
Core
Core
Core
Core
Core
Elective Core
Elective
Elective
Core
Core
Core
Elective
Core
Core
Elective

Exam 70-216: Implementing and Administering a Microsoft Windows 2000
Network Infrastructure
Exam 70-224: Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft Exchange
2000 Server
Exam 70-228: Installing, Configuring and Administering Microsoft SQL Server
2000 Enterprise Edition
ii. Course Unit Description
MCDBA on Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Certification Requirements
128
Elective
Elective
Elective
The MCDBA credential is the premier certification for professionals who implement and administer Microsoft SQL
Server databases. Microsoft Certified Database Administrators (MCDBAs) design, implement, and administer
Microsoft SQL Server databases. Microsoft Certified Database Administrator (MCDBA) on Microsoft SQL
Server 2000 candidates need to pass three core exams and one elective exam that provide a valid and
reliable measure of technical proficiency and expertise in the implementation and administration of SQL
Server databases. Microsoft Windows Server 2003 exams now can be used to fulfill the networking systems core
exam requirement in combination with SQL Server 2000 exams.
Core Exams (3 Exams Required)
MCDBA candidates are required to pass one SQL Server administration exam and one SQL Server design exam. In
addition, MCDBA candidates have the option to pass either one Windows 2000 Server or one Windows Server
2003 exam to fulfill the networking systems core requirement.
Elective Exams (1 Exam Required)
In addition to the core exam requirements, you must also pass one elective exam that provides proof of expertise
with a specific Microsoft server product.
The following Windows Server 2003 exams have been added to the MCDBA track as options to the core
requirements:
• Exam 70-290: Managing and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Environment.
• Exam 70-291: Implementing, Managing, and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Network
Infrastructure will be added in September 2003 to the pool of electives.
• Exam 70-293: Planning and Maintaining a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Network Infrastructure will be
added in September 2003 to the pool of electives.
MCSE on Microsoft Windows 2000 Certification Requirements
The MCSE credential is the premier certification for professionals who analyze the business requirements
and design and implement the infrastructure for business solutions based on the Microsoft Windows 2000
platform and Microsoft server software. Microsoft Certified Systems Engineers (MCSEs) design and
implement an infrastructure solution based on the Windows platform and Microsoft Servers software. They
are among the most technically proficient professionals available to help organizations make a successful
transition to the Windows 2000 operating system and to ensure that they reap the ongoing benefits that
Windows 2000 and Active Directory are designed to deliver. Specializations include MCSE: Messaging and
MCSE: Security. Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer (MCSE) candidates on the Microsoft Windows® 2000 track
are required to pass seven exams or the equivalent that include the following:

Core Exams (5 Exams Required)
• Four (4) Operating System exams. Candidates must pass one exam from each set of operating
system exams—client operating system and networking system—in the table that follows.
• One (1) design exam. Candidates must pass one exam that provides proof of expertise for design skills
for specific Microsoft server technologies.
Elective Exams (2 Exams Required). The elective exams provide a valid and reliable measure of technical
proficiency and expertise in solution design and implementation.
MCSE on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Certification Requirements
Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer (MCSE) candidates on the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 track are
required to satisfy the following requirements:
Core Exams (6 Exams Required)
• Four networking system exams
• One client Operating System exam
• One design exam
Elective Exams (1 Exam Required)
Together with the core exams, the elective exams provide a valid and reliable measure of technical proficiency and
expertise in solution design and implementation.
Note: Core exams are a must for MCSE on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Core Elective exams: Any one of the
two exams must be done
MCSA on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Certification Requirements
The MCSA on Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 certification is designed for professionals who
implement, manage, and troubleshoot existing network and system environments based on the Microsoft Windows
2000 Server platforms. Microsoft Certified Systems Administrators (MCSAs) administer network and systems
environments based on the Microsoft Windows platforms. Specializations include MCSA: Messaging and MCSA:
Security. The Microsoft Certified Systems Administrator (MCSA) certification helps students to advance their career
by ensuring they have the skills to successfully manage and troubleshoot system environments running on Microsoft
Windows operating systems. Microsoft Windows® Server 2003-based operating environments. MCSA candidates are
required to pass three core exams and one elective exam.
Note: Core exams are a must. One elective exam must be done.
MCSA on Microsoft Windows 2000 Certification Requirements
MCSA candidates are required to pass three core exams and one elective exam.
Microsoft Office Specialist (MOS)
Microsoft Office Specialist is the only comprehensive, performance-based certification Programme approved by
Microsoft to validate desktop computer skills using Microsoft Office applications. Microsoft Office Specialists
(Office Specialists) are globally recognized for demonstrating advanced skills with Microsoft desktop
software. To earn the Microsoft Office Specialist (Office Specialist) certification for Microsoft Office, one must pass
one or more certification exams. Office Specialist exams provide a valid and reliable measure of technical
proficiency and expertise by evaluating your overall comprehension of Office or Microsoft Project Programmes,
your ability to use their advanced features, and your ability to integrate the Office Programmes with other software
Programmes. Office Specialist exams are administered at Authorized Testing Centers worldwide.
129

MCSD for Microsoft .NET Certification
Microsoft Certified Solution Developers (MCSDs) design and develop leading-edge business solutions with
Microsoft development tools, technologies, platforms, and the Windows architecture. The Microsoft Certified
Solution Developer (MCSD) for Microsoft .NET credential is the top-level certification for advanced
developers who design and develop leading-edge enterprise solutions, using Microsoft development tools and
technologies as well as the Microsoft .NET Framework. Candidates for this certification are required to pass four
core exams and one elective exam. The core exams provide a valid and reliable measure of technical
proficiency and expertise in developing and maintaining enterprise applications that are based on Microsoft
development tools, technologies, and platforms. The elective exam provides proof of expertise with a specific
Microsoft server product.
Minimum Admission Requirements for Microsoft Academy Courses
The courses are skills-based and therefore open to every one who is computer literate and has knowledge of English.
10.5 Staff Development Programmes
This is done through seminars, workshops and short courses such as Certificate in Information Technology run by
the End User Training Project (EUTP) for all academic and administrative staff and students of Makerere
University; and Consultancy services to both the private and public sectors.
10.6 Multimedia Certificate Courses:
The following are the New Courses that started in April 2009 and are aimed at offering Hands On Experience in
Multimedia Applications. These courses are geared towards industrial production and are taught by leading experts
in the field. They will mainly be PRACTICAL and will be offered in the newly equipped Multimedia Lab at CIT.
These courses include;
• Introduction to Multimedia Applications
• Certificate in Graphics and Image Editing
• Certificate in Video Editing and Animation
• Certificate in Digital Audio using Logic Pro
• Certificate in Dynamic Website Development
• Certificate in Publishing and Branding
Minimum Admission Requirements for Microsoft Academy Courses
Computer Knowledge is required. All applicants should have completed Senior Six at the minimum.
10.7 Oracle Programmes
The Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology, Makerere University, is a member of the Oracle
Academy Initiative offering Oracle Certified Associate (OCA) and Oracle Associate Professional (OCP).
However OCP has not taken off at the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology but it is hoped to begin
very soon. Oracle Associates acquire a foundation knowledge that will allow them to keep the Oracle
database environment running all the time. They are able to install, maintain, troubleshoot, and fine-tune the
Oracle9i database with all the newest features the Oracle9i database offers. The Oracle9i Database Administrator
Certification consists of two paths, which are to be taken in sequence:
i. Oracle9i Database Administrator Certified Associate (OCA)
Two exams are required to obtain the Oracle 9iDBA OCA.
a) Introduction to Oracle9i SQL
b) Oracle9i Database Fundamentals I
130

a) Introduction to 9i SQL:
Course Content: Writing a Basic SQL Statement; Restricting and Sorting Data; Single Row Functions; Displaying
Data from Multiple Tables; Writing Sub queries; Producing Readable Output with iSQL*Plus; Manipulating Data;
Creating and Managing Tables; Including Constraints; Creating Views; Other Database Objects; SQL Workshop;
Using Set Operators; Oracle9i Single Row Functions; Enhancements to the GROUP BY Clause; Advanced Sub
queries; Hierarchical Retrieval; Extensions to DDL and DML Statements and Writing Scripts to Generate Scripts.
b) Oracle9i Database Fundamentals I:
Course Content: Oracle Architectural Components; Getting Started with the Oracle Server; Identifying the features
of the Universal Installer; Defining the Optimal Flexible Architecture; Identifying database administrative users;
Managing an Oracle Instance; Creating a Database; Using the Data Dictionary; Maintaining the Control File;
Maintaining Redo Log Files; Managing Table spaces and Data files; Describing storage hierarchy; Establishing the
difference between SYSTEM and Non-SYSTEM table spaces; Storage Structures and Relationships; Managing
Undo Data; Creating and maintaining UNDO tables paces; Managing Tables and Managing Indexes
ii. Oracle9i Database Administrator Certified Professional (OCP)
After achieving the OCA, Oracle training has to be continued along with gaining on-the-job experience to pass the
required exams and move up to the OCP level. For 9iOCP one instructor led course is a requirement. Exams for OCP
include:
• Oracle9i Database Fundamentals I
• Oracle9i Database Performance and Tuning
Minimum Admission Requirements
To be admitted for a course leading to the award of Certificate in OCA, a candidate must have completed A’ Level and
therefore he/she has A’ Level certificate.
iii. Oracle Certified Professional (OCP) - Proposed
10.8 Geographical Information Systems (GIS)
Subject Details;
a) Introduction to GIS
The Faculty of computing and IT has introduced a new short course in Geographical Information Systems (GIS) that
will cover; Introduction to GIS, GIS & Business, GIS & Telecommunications, GIS & Government. It will be taught
in CIT's newly set up advanced GIS Lab. Training in specialized Geographical Information Systems (GIS) topics for
private and public sectors in Uganda are as follows;
• Spatial Data Capture and Input;
• Spatial Data Structures;
• Spatial Data Manipulation and Analysis;
• Practicals on Online GIS and ArcExplorer.
b) Application to GIS
i. General Introduction to GIS;
ii. Practical GIS sessions in various application domains such as:
• Utilities (Water, Electricity, Telecom),
• Governance,
• Fleet Management,
• Marketing Intelligence.
131

10.9 Cisco Academy Programmes
In July 2002, Makerere University Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology (CIT) was approved as a
Regional Cisco Networking Academy under a partnership with Cisco Systems Inc. The four popular Cisco
Systems Programmes offered are; (a) Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) (b) Cisco Certified Network
Professional (CCNP) (c) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and (d) Instructional Technology Essentials I
and II (IT Essentials I & II.
A Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) Programme
CCNA is a comprehensive curriculum that includes four separate modules. The curriculum emphasizes the use
of decision-making and problem-solving techniques to resolve networking issues. Students learn how to
install and configure switches and routers in local and wide-area networks using various protocols and provide
Level 1 troubleshooting service, and improve network performance and security. Additionally, training is provided in
the proper care, maintenance, and use of networking software tools and equipment. The CCNA certification course
features the following modules:
a) CCNA Discovery1: Networking for Home and Small Businesses
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to proficiently: Set up a personal computer system, including the operating system, interface cards
and peripheral devices; Plan and install a small business network and connect it to the Internet; Verify and
troubleshoot network and Internet connectivity; Share resources such as files and printers among multiple
computers; Recognize and mitigate security threats to a home network; Configure and certify common
Internet applications; Configure basic IP services through a GUI.
b) CCNA Discovery2: Working at a Small-to-Medium Business or ISP
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to proficiently: Describe the structure of the Internet and how communication occurs between
hosts; Install, configure, and troubleshoot Cisco IOS devices for Internet and server connectivity; Plan a
basic wired infrastructure to support network traffic; Configure a server to share resources and provide
common Web services; Implement basic WAN connectivity using Telco services; Demonstrate proper
disaster recovery procedures and perform server backups; Monitor network performance and isolate
failures; Troubleshoot problems using an organized, layered procedure; Describe the OSI model and the
process of encapsulation.
c) CCNA Discovery3: Introducing Routing and Switching in the Enterprise
During the Introducing Routing and Switching in the Enterprise course, administered by the undersigned
instructor, the student demonstrated the following competencies: Configure a switch with VLANs and
inter-switch communication; Perform LAN, WAN, and VLAN troubleshooting using a structured
methodology and the OSI model; Implement a LAN for an approved network design; Implement access
lists to permit or deny specified traffic; Implement WAN links; Configure routing protocols on Cisco
devices.
d) CCNA Discovery4: Designing and Supporting Computer Networks
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to proficiently: Gather customer requirements; Design a simple Internetwork using Cisco
technology; Design an IP addressing scheme to meet LAN requirements; Create an equipment list to meet
LAN design requirements; Create and present a proposal to a customer; Install and configure a prototype
Internetwork; Obtain and upgrade Cisco IOS Software in Cisco devices.
132

Minimum Admission Requirements
To be admitted for a course leading to the award of CCNA Certificate, a candidate must have completed O’ Level and
thus possesses O’ Level Certificate.
B. Cisco Certified Network Professional (CCNP) Programme
The professional-level curriculum builds on CCNA with more complex network configurations, diagnosis, and
troubleshooting. Students learn about complex network configurations and how to diagnose and troubleshoot
network problems. Trains students to install configure and operate local and wide-area networks (LANs and WANs),
and dial access services for organizations with networks from 100 to more than 500 nodes with protocols and
technologies such as: TCP/IP, OSPF, EIGRP, BGP, ISDN, Frame Relay, STP, and VTP. The focus is on
developing those skills that enable students to implement scalable networks, build campus networks using
multilayer switching technologies, create and deploy a global intranet, and troubleshooting routers and
switches for multiprotocol client hosts and services. The CCNP certification course features the following modules:
a) CCNP1: Building Scalable Internetworks
During the Building Scalable Internetworks course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
demonstrated the following competencies: Explain routing in the enterprise network; Implement and verify
multicast forwarding using PIM; Implement IPv6 in an enterprise network; Implement and verify EIGRP
operations; Build a scalable multi-area network with OSPF; Implement route optimization; Implement and
verify BGP for enterprise ISP connectivity; Implement and verify IS-IS.
b) CCNP2: Implementing Secured Converged Wide-Area Networks
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to Proficiently: Implement basic teleworker services; Implement Frame-Mode MPLS; Implement
a site-to-site IPSec VPN; Describe network security strategies; Implement Cisco Device Hardening;
Implement Cisco IOS firewall; Describe and configure Cisco IOS IP.
c) CCNP3: Building Multilayer Switched Networks
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to proficiently: Implement VLANs; Conduct the operation of Spanning Tree protocols in a
hierarchical network; Implement Inter-VLAN routing; Implement gateway redundancy technologies;
Describe and configure wireless client access; Describe and configure security features in a switched
network; Configure support for voice.
d) CCNP4: Optimizing Converged Networks
During the Cisco® Networking Academy course, administered by the undersigned instructor, the student
was able to proficiently: Describe Cisco VoIP implementations; Describe QOS considerations; Describe
DiffServ QOS implementations; Implement Auto QOS; Implement WLAN security and management.
Minimum Admission Requirements:
To be admitted for a course leading to the award of CCNP Certificate, a candidate must have completed CCNA and
thus possesses CCNA certificate.
C. Information Technology (IT) - Essentials I & II
This course introduces students to information technology and data communications. This hands-on, lab-oriented
course stresses laboratory safety and working effectively in a group environment.
133

a) IT Essentials I: PC Hardware and Software Competencies
This presents an in-depth exposure to computer hardware and operating systems. Students learn the functionality of
hardware and software components as well as suggested best practices in maintenance, and safety issues. Through
hands on activities and labs, students learn how to assemble and configure a computer, install operating systems and
software, and troubleshoot hardware and software problems. In addition, an introduction to networking is included.
Acquired competencies:
• Building a computer and installation of the motherboard, floppy and hard drives, CDROM, and video cards.
• Installing and managing Windows operating systems. * Adding peripherals and multimedia capabilities.
• Knowledge of local-area network architecture, networking protocols and the OSI Model, and TCP/IP utilities.
• Connecting the computer to a local area network and to the Internet.
• In addition to basic networking concepts, the functions and configurations of a network are also covered.
b) IT Essentials II: Network Operating Systems
This hands-on, lab-oriented course is designed to be an overview of network operating systems and specifically covers
the Linux Red Hat Network operating system. Students will learn how to use the Linux operating system, the K
Desktop Environment (KDE), and GNU Network Object Model (GNOME). This course will be a stepping stone to
help prepare students for challenging careers, such as skilled hardware support professional and Linux support
professional.
Acquired competencies:
• Configuration of network services, including basic network security and troubleshooting.
• Use fundamental command-line features of the Linux environment including file system navigation,
file permissions, the vi text editor, command shells, and basic network use.
• Explore GUI features including Applications Manager, Text Editor, printing, and mail. * Know basic
administrative tasks with Windows 2000.
Minimum Admission Requirements:
To be admitted for a course leading to the award of Certificate in IT Essentials, a candidate must have basic knowledge
about the computer or she/he must have completed CCA.
10.10 Computer Systems Engineering
Candidates will learn to design, implement and maintain computer systems. The modules covered include: Basic
electronics; Digital Technology; Microprocessor Technology; Computer programming; embedded systems; Digital
systems design; Advanced Computer Maintenance. In each module the students conduct experiments and part of the
requirements to complete the course the students work on a relevant industry challenge as their project
11 Summary of the Duration/Time of Study/Training Fees for Short Courses
Course Time of Study Duration/Fees
Certificate in Computer Applications Early Morning
5weeks
[CCA]
6:00 AM - 8:00 AM
80,000/=
Regular Classes
5weeks
09:00–11:00,
14:00 – 16:00 &
19:00 – 21:00
100,000/=
Midnight Class
5weeks
00:00 – 06:00
[60,000/=]
Weekend Class
5weeks
09:00 -11:00 (Sat)
14:00 - 16:00 (Sun)
100,000/=
134

International Computer Driving License
(ICDL]
Tuesdays to Thursdays
17:00 - 19:00
Cisco Certified Network Associate Early Morning classes
[CCNA]
06:00 -08:00
Regular classes
10:00 - 12:00
14:00 - 16:00 &
18:00 – 20:00
Midnight Class
00:00 - 06:00
Weekend Class
11:00 - 14:00 (Sat)
09:00 – 16:00 (Sun)
Cisco Certified Network Professional Evening
[CCNP]
18:00 – 21:00
IT Essentials I & II Week days
14:00 – 17:00
18:00 - 21:00
Microsoft Professional Certification Week days
Courses (MCSE, MCDBA, MCSA, 18:00 - 21:00
MCSD & MOUS)
Weekend
Oracle Certified Associate (OCA) Weekend class
09:00 – 13:00(Sat)
Video Editing and Animation Mon & Wed or Tue & Thursday
16:00-18:00
Graphics & Image Editing Mon & Wed or Tue & Thursday
11:00-13:00
Dynamic Website Development Tue & Thursday
13:30 - 15:30
or Sat & Sun
12:00 - 14:00
Geographical Information Systems Mon & Wed
14:00-18:00
Computer Systems Engineering Mon, Wed & Fri
14:00 – 18:00
Oracle Associate Professional (OCP) (Proposed)
NB: Special Offer for Ladies is ONLY on CCNA at 300,000/= anytime of study
12 Intake for Short Courses
135
7weeks
Training [140,000/=]
Certification Testing [140,000/=]
4months
[370,000/=]
6months
[450,000/=]
4months
[280,000]
6months
[450,000/=]
8months
[555,000/=]
3 months
[370,000/=]
5weeks per module
At [370,000/=]
Certification Testing
[250,000 per exam]
14weeks
[555,000/=]
Certification testing (270,000/=)
3 Months
(400,000/=)
3 Months
(400,000/=)
3 Months
(400,000/=)
4 weeks
[250,000/=]
10 Weeks
[500,000/=]
Course Intake period Award
Cisco Certified Network Associate
(CCNA) Programme
Every after 2month. International Certificate
Cisco Certified Network At the Beginning of every Month International Certificate
Professional (CCNP) Programme
Certificate in Computer
At the Beginning of every Month Makerere University - CIT
Applications (CCA)
Certificate
Oracle programme Every after 4months (3 times a year) International Certificate
Microsoft Certification Every Month International Certificate
International Computer Driving
License (ICDL)
Every after 2months International Certificate

EUTP Every after 17 weeks Makerere University - CIT
Certificate
Multimedia Certification Courses Every after 2 Months Makerere University - CIT
Certificate
Computer Systems Engineering Every after 2 Months Makerere University – CIT
Certificate
13 Application Forms
For application forms and more information about short courses, please visit the Faculty Front Office, level 1, our
website: www.cit.ac.ug/psd/, call us on +256 414 540628 or write to info@cit.mak.ac.ug.
14 Registration Procedure
Pay the tuition fee at any of the DFCU Bank branches, Account No: 0IL2550588800 for UGX only and Account
Name: Makerere University Faculty of Computing and IT for all accounts, using the deposit slips at the bank. Present
the deposit slip to the Front Office Administrators of the Faculty of Computing and Informatics Technology for
registration. Tuition fees for applicants with forged academic documents will not be refunded.
136

137